JP6530175B2 - Information display device - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to an information display device provided corresponding to a game machine and having at least a display unit capable of displaying game data.

  Conventionally, as the information display device described above, as shown in Patent Document 1, one that can be turned downward or tilted forward to facilitate the operation of a call button, as shown in Patent Document 2, It is known that a display panel protrudes when a jackpot signal is received from a pachinko machine.

JP 2011-217801 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-080565

  In these information display devices, it is an issue to highlight and display information under specific conditions such as an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  The present invention has been made under such a background, and the object thereof is to provide an information display device capable of highlighting and displaying information in an advantageous state for the player. It is.

  The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the problems. The reference numerals used in the description of the best mode for carrying out the invention described later and the drawings are appended in parentheses for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to the appended ones.

First, the invention according to means 1 is
It is provided corresponding to the gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine),
A first display unit (1410) capable of displaying at least game data (big hit, start number, definite big hit number, normal big hit number, BB number, ART number, number of games, dollar box display of acquired game media number),
The corresponding gaming machine can display advantageous data (number of remaining fluctuation of probability variation, number of remaining ART games, number of winnings in ART) which is gaming data in an advantageous status (probability status, ART status) advantageous to the player A second display unit (1420),
Information display device (information display device 1400 according to the sixth embodiment) having
Movement processing means (L102) for moving the second display unit to a predetermined position based on the fact that predetermined information (probability change signal, ART signal) indicating the advantageous state is input to the information display device. processing further have a CPU) to perform the,
The second display unit is an information display device characterized in that the display content of the first display unit hidden by the second display unit can be displayed when the second display unit is at a position overlapping the first display unit. .
According to this, since the second display unit displaying the advantageous data is moved to the predetermined position in the advantageous condition, the information can be highlighted and displayed in the advantageous condition.

The invention according to means 2 is
An information display device described in the means 1;
The corresponding gaming machine is capable of executing a predetermined number of games during the advantageous state (probable change state, ART state), and generates an advantageous state signal (probability change signal, ART signal) indicating the advantageous state. It is output as predetermined information,
The number of games to be displayed on the second display as a display based on the number of games executed during the advantageous state, based on the fact that the advantageous state signal is input to the information display device The information display apparatus further comprises display processing means (a CPU for displaying the remaining number of fluctuation of the probability change and the number of remaining games of the ART).
According to this, it is possible to highlight and display information on the number of games executed during the advantageous state.

Also, the invention according to means 3 is
The information display device described in the means 1 or 2;
The corresponding gaming machine can give a predetermined gaming value (pachinko ball, medal, score) during the advantageous state (probable change state, ART state), and an advantageous state signal (indicating the advantageous state ( Outputting a definite variation signal, an ART signal) as the predetermined information,
A game value for performing a process of displaying a display based on the game value provided during the advantageous state as the advantageous data on the second display unit based on the fact that the advantageous state signal is input to the information display device. The information display apparatus further comprises display processing means (a CPU for displaying the number of obtained balls and the number of obtained sheets).
According to this, it is possible to highlight and display information on the gaming value given during the advantageous state.

Also, the invention according to means 4 is
The information display device described in any one of the means 1 to 3, wherein
The corresponding gaming machine can output a game result signal (a strike signal and a payout signal, a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal) indicating a game result,
The information display device further includes determination means (CPU for performing determination of L101 ′) that determines whether or not the advantageous state is based on the input of the game result signal.
The information processing characterized in that the movement processing means moves the second display portion to a predetermined position based on the determination that the determination means is in the advantageous state (YES at L101 ′). It is an apparatus.
According to this, even if the gaming machine does not output the signal during the advantageous state, it is possible to perform the process of moving the second display unit to the predetermined position.

The invention according to means 5 is
The information display device described in any one of the means 1 to 4, wherein
The information processing apparatus is characterized in that the movement processing means performs a process of moving the second display unit to a position overlapping the first display unit (for example, the center of the first display unit) as the predetermined position. is there.
According to this, information can be emphasized and displayed in the advantageous state.

The invention according to means 6 is
The information display device described in any one of the means 1 to 4, wherein
An information display apparatus characterized in that the movement processing means moves the second display unit to a position not overlapping with the first display unit (for example, outside the first display unit) as the predetermined position. It is.
According to this, it is possible to highlight and display information in the advantageous state, and to display at a position different from the first display unit.

The invention according to means 7 is
The information display device described in any one of the means 1 to 6, wherein
The corresponding gaming machine is capable of outputting a specific signal (feature moving signal),
A process of moving the first display unit or the second display unit to a position (for example, upward) away from the gaming machine based on the fact that the specific signal is input to the information display device. Information display device characterized by performing.
According to this, for example, it is possible to prevent the display from being obscured by an accessory projecting from the gaming machine.

Also, the invention according to means 8 is
The information display device described in the means 2 or 3, wherein
The corresponding gaming machine is temporarily put in a non-output state according to satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, every 100 acquired sheets in ART, every ART 100 game, every 20 winnings of a specific combination) as the signal during the advantageous state It outputs a signal during intermittent advantageous state (see Fig. 73),
Based on the fact that the signal during the intermittent advantageous state is inputted to the information display device, the number of times of establishment of the predetermined condition (the number of consecutive times) is added, and the number of times of establishment is regarded as the advantageous data in the second display unit. The information display apparatus is further characterized by: an established number display processing unit that performs processing for displaying.
According to this, it is possible to specify the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied.

The invention according to means 9 is
The information display device described in any one of the means 1 to 8 (the ball rental unit 120 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment to which the information display device of the sixth embodiment is applied, or the fourth embodiment The card unit 3)
Ownership value storage means for storing the ownership value (the number of balls, the number of balls possessed, the number of possessed medals) which can be used for the game in the gaming machine and owned by the player for each lending rate (The ball table of the control unit 122),
Convert a first ownership value (for example, 4 yen number of balls) corresponding to one loan rate stored in the ownership value storage means into a second ownership value (for example, 1 yen balls number) corresponding to the other loan rates Conversion means (the CPU of the control unit 122 which performs the conversion process of S118);
The first display unit number obtained by converting the first ownership value before conversion in a predetermined display unit (2000 balls) and the second ownership value after conversion are converted in the predetermined display unit The information display device further includes unit number display means (a CPU of the control unit 122 performing the processing of S102 and S109 or S115 and the display 124) for displaying the second display unit number.
According to this, the first number of display units obtained by converting the first ownership value before conversion in a predetermined display unit and the second number of conversions after the conversion are converted in a predetermined display unit Since the number of display units is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize how much the game is possible based on the possession value of the other loan rate after conversion.

It is a functional block diagram showing an example of a game system concerning a 1st embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a ball storage DB managed by a member management device, (b) is a diagram showing conversion availability for each upper limit setting, (c) is managed by the member management device It is a figure showing an example of conversion history DB. It is a figure showing an example of the conversion upper limit setting screen displayed on the display of a member management apparatus, (a) in the case of conversion to 4 yen-> 1 yen, (b) in the case of conversion to 1 yen-> 4 yen It is. (A) is a front view showing an example of a pachinko machine and a ball lending unit, (b) is a cross-sectional right view showing an example of a ball lending unit. It is a figure showing an example of a ball storage table which a ball rental unit memorizes, and (a) is before conversion. (B) is after conversion. It is a flowchart showing an example of the process during sales which the control part of a ball lending unit performs. It is a flowchart showing an example of the conversion process which is a subroutine which the control part of a ball lending unit performs. It is a flowchart showing an example of the ball re-playing process which is a subroutine which a control part of a ball lending unit performs. It is a figure showing an example of the screen displayed on the display of a ball lending unit by conversion processing and storage ball replay processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of a ball replay processing which is a subroutine which a control part of a ball lending unit performs in a gaming system according to a second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the screen displayed on the display of a ball lending unit in the game storage processing in a game system concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of system configuration of the 3rd game system concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the information in the 3rd game system, and a signal. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a pachinko machine and a stand interval counter unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a stand interval counter. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a hall | hole computer. It is a figure which shows an example of a table configuration of a display table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of the table for display simultaneously. It is a figure which shows an example of a table configuration of a 1st display part display pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a 2nd display part display pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the setting data for a display. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of a game aggregation database. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of the threshold value table for possession ball special display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of management processing. It is a continuation of the management process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a display setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the flow of display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the flow of display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a flow of possession ball special display control processing. It is explanatory drawing of the principle of possession ball special display. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a stand interval counting unit process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a possession ball special display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a possession ball special display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a possession ball special display screen. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of 2nd possession ball special display control processing. It is a figure showing an example of system configuration of the 4th game system concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the information in the 4th game system, and a signal. It is a figure showing an example of the appearance composition of a pachinko machine and a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a ball | bowl management computer. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of member data. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of card | curd management data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a card unit process. It is a continuation of the card unit process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a ball-of-balls addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a ball-bearing division process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display part of a card unit. It is a front view which shows an example of an external appearance structure of an enclosed type pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the display part provided in each stand counter. It is a figure which shows an example of a table configuration of the display table in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of the 2nd display part display pattern table in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the possession ball special display in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of a LED light emission table. It is a figure which shows an example of the housing of the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the game type tabulation graph displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the game type tabulation graph displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a discharge intensity threshold range table. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of passage area data classified by discharge intensity. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the injection area | region data classified by discharge intensity. It is a figure which shows an example of the total graph classified by emission intensity displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure showing an example of system configuration of the 5th game system concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game information of the own shop displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus, and another shop. It is a figure showing an example of the information display apparatus which concerns on 6th Embodiment, (a) is a disassembled perspective view, (b) is a side sectional view of the state attached to a curtain, (c) is movement of a 2nd display part FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of a 2nd display part movement process which the information display apparatus which concerns on 6th Embodiment performs, (a) is an Example, (b) is a modification. It is a figure showing an example in case an information display device concerning a 6th embodiment is provided corresponding to a pachinko machine. It is a figure showing an example in case an information display concerning a 6th embodiment is provided corresponding to a slot machine. It is a figure showing the modification of the information display apparatus which concerns on 6th Embodiment, (a) is an example which a 2nd display part moves to the position which does not overlap with a 1st display part, (b) a 2nd display part moves This is an example in which the first display unit moves without being moved. The information display apparatus which concerns on 6th Embodiment WHEREIN: It is a figure showing an example in case a signal is input in an intermittent advantageous state.

  The gaming apparatus according to the present invention can be used for playing in a gaming machine (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, the slot machine) Ownership value storage means (control unit 122) for storing the ownership value (the number of balls, the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals) owned by each for each lending rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the ownership value is lent. And the first owning value (for example, 4 yen number of balls) corresponding to the one lending rate stored in the owning value storage means, and the second owning value (for example 1) corresponding to the other lending rate A gaming apparatus (ball lending unit 120 according to the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the fourth embodiment) comprising: conversion means (CPU of the control unit 122 which performs the conversion process of S118) for converting into the number of yen balls Card unit 3) pertaining to .

  In addition, the gaming system according to the present invention manages ownership value which is usable for playing in the gaming machine and which manages the ownership value owned by the player for each lending rate when the ownership value is lent. Means (the ball table of the control unit 122, the ball storage DB of the member management device 162, the CPU of the ball management computer 8) and the first ownership value corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management unit Conversion means for converting into the second ownership value corresponding to another loan rate (the CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the conversion process of S118, the CPU of the member management device 162 that performs the conversion process, and the ball that performs the conversion process A game system (a game system 1 according to the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and a fourth game system 1B according to the fourth embodiment) including the CPU of the management computer 8).

  Furthermore, the information display device according to the present invention is provided corresponding to a game machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine), and at least game data (big hit number, start number number, definite variation big hit number, normal big hit number, BB number, ART) The first display portion 1410 capable of displaying the number of times, the number of games, the number of acquired game media, and the corresponding gaming machine are gaming data in an advantageous state (probable change state, ART state) for the player. An information display device (an information display device 400 according to the sixth embodiment) having a second display unit 1420 capable of displaying advantageous data (the number of remaining fluctuation of positive variation, the number of remaining ART games, and the number of acquired ARTs) is there.

  In this gaming system, a gaming system 1 (FIGS. 1 to 11) according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and a gaming system 1A (FIGS. 12 to 40) according to the third embodiment, A gaming system 1B (FIGS. 41 to 65) according to the fourth embodiment, a gaming system 1C (FIGS. 66 to 67) according to the fifth embodiment, and an information display apparatus 1400 (figure) according to the sixth embodiment. 68 to 73). Each embodiment will be described below. In the following, an example in which the gaming machine is a pachinko machine and the gaming medium is a pachinko ball will be described. In the following, the database is abbreviated as "DB", the reader / writer as "R / W", and the step S as "S".

[1. First embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming system 1 according to the first embodiment is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each of a plurality of pachinko machines 110 arranged on each of a plurality of gaming islands in a game arcade. A ball rental unit 120, an island computer 163 provided on each of the plurality of gaming islands and capable of communicating with all the ball lending units 120 provided on each gaming island, and a hall computer 160 capable of communicating with all the island computers 163, A balance management device 161 and a member management device 162 are provided.

  In this gaming system 1, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), a prepaid card 102 is used. The prepaid card 102 is a card ID in which the prepaid card 102 can be individually identified, and prepaid balance data indicating a prepaid balance which is a valuable value is stored as information which can specify a valuable value, and the player On the other hand, it is issued by the ball lending unit 120 or a prepaid card issuing device (not shown) provided at a predetermined place in the game arcade.

  Further, in the gaming system 1, as shown in FIG. 4B, a membership card 103 is used. In the member card 103, a card ID capable of individually identifying the member card 103 and prepaid balance data indicating a prepaid balance which is a valuable value are stored as information which can specify a valuable value, and a game which is a member Member ID capable of individually identifying a player is stored as information capable of specifying the number of stored balls, which is an owned value owned by the player, and for the player who is a member, the exchange of prizes in the game arcade It is issued by a counter or the like (not shown). In the membership card 103, the number of balls itself is not stored.

  Here, the hall computer 160, the remaining amount management device 161, the member management device 162, and the island computer 163 will be described with reference to FIG. The hall computer 160, balance management device 161, and member management device 162 include a communication unit, control unit (CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.), input means (keyboard, mouse, etc.), output means (display, etc.), storage means (display, etc.) A computer such as a hard disk). The island computer 163 is data communication between the ball lending unit 120 connected (that is, disposed on the game island where the island computer 163 is provided) and the hall computer 160, the balance management device 161, and the member management device 162. Relay device that relays

  The hall computer 160 counts and grasps various information. For example, when a bill is received by the bill validator 123 of the ball lending unit 120, the ball lending unit 120 receives a signal which is output as one pulse for every 1000 yen accepted, and counts the accepted amount. In addition, when the ball lending process is performed in the ball lending unit 120, the ball lending unit 120 receives a signal output one pulse for every use amount of 100 yen, and totals the use amount. In addition, the information for totaling the amount of use is not limited to the signal of 100 yen and 1 pulse, for example, it may be a signal of 108 yen and 1 pulse in consideration of consumption tax, and the amount of use itself is transmitted as data May be. Alternatively, a signal capable of specifying the number of times of ball lending processing may be transmitted, and the number of times of ball lending processing may be totaled in the hall computer 160 to specify the amount of use. That is, the information for totaling the amount of use is not particularly limited as long as the information can specify the amount of use.

  In addition, when the ball lending unit 120 is reset, the ball lending unit 120 receives a signal that is output one pulse at each reset, and recognizes the reset. Also, when an error occurs in the ball lending unit 120, the ball lending unit 120 receives a signal that is output one pulse for each error, and recognizes the error. Also, when a game is played in the pachinko machine 110 and the impacted ball is counted by the impacted ball counter (not shown), a signal output for every 10 counts is received from the impacted ball counter, Count the number of balls included.

  The balance management device 161 stores a balance DB, which stores the prepaid balance which is a valuable value owned by the player and is prepaid value prepaid by the player in association with the card ID of the prepaid card 102 or the membership card 103. It is possessed.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, the member management device 162 is an owned value which can be used for a game on a gaming machine and is owned by a player in association with the member ID and password of the member card 103. It has a ball storage DB for storing the number of balls obtained by saving the pachinko balls obtained by the player so as to be usable from the next day onwards. Here, the storage content of the ball storage DB is updated as follows.

  First, when a membership card 103 and a counting card (not shown) are received at a prize storage terminal (possibly also a prize exchange terminal) provided in a prize exchange counter or the like and the ball processing is performed, the membership card 103 is executed. The ball storage terminal transmits a ball addition request including the member ID read from the card and the acquired ball number specified from the counting card to the member management device 162 from the ball storage terminal, and the ball addition is performed in the ball DB of the member management device 162. The number of acquired balls included in the request for adding the balls is added as the number of balls to the number of balls stored in association with the member ID included in the request.

  In addition, when the member card 103 is received by the prize exchange terminal provided in the prize exchange counter or the like and the prize exchange processing is performed, the member ID read from the member card 103 and the number of used balls provided for the prize exchange. The ball subtraction request including the number is transmitted from the prize exchange terminal to the member management device 162, and the number of balls stored in the ball storage DB of the member management device 162 in association with the member ID included in the ball subtraction request. From the above, the number of used balls included in the storage ball subtraction request is subtracted.

  Further, when the member card 103 is accepted by the ball lending unit 120 and the ball replay processing is performed, a ball subtraction including the member ID read from the member card 103 and the number of used balls provided for the ball replay is performed. A request is sent from the ball lending unit 120 to the member management device 162, and the number of balls stored in the ball storage DB of the member management device 162 is stored in association with the member ID included in the ball subtraction request. The number of used balls included in the storage ball subtraction request is subtracted.

  Furthermore, when the member card 103 is accepted by the ball lending unit 120 and conversion processing is performed, the member ID read from the member card 103 and the first owned value (for example, the number of 4-yen balls) to be converted are included. A ball subtraction request and a ball addition request including the member ID and a second owned value (for example, 1 yen number of balls stored) converted are transmitted from the ball rental unit 120 to the member management device 162, and the member management In the storage ball DB of the device 162, the first ownership value included in the storage ball subtraction request is subtracted from the first ownership value stored in association with the member ID included in the storage ball subtraction request, and The second ownership value included in the storage addition request is added to the second ownership value stored in association with the member ID included in the storage addition request. The storage subtraction request here is the same as that transmitted in the prize exchange processing and the storage replay processing, and the storage addition request is the same as that transmitted in the storage processing.

  This ball storage DB functions as an ownership value management means, and the number of balls held is the number of balls held, which is the first number of balls held, 4 yen, which corresponds to the first loan rate (4 yen in this example) It manages the number of 1 yen balls, which is the second owning value corresponding to the other lending rate (1 yen in this example). In the present example, for one member ID, it is not possible to store balls such that the sum of the 4 yen ball number and the 1 yen ball number exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 250,000 balls having the same specific value as described later). If you try to store 1 yen ball of 200,000 balls further when the number of yen balls is 70,000 and 1 yen ball is 0, notification that the ball terminal can only save 1 yen ball up to 180,000 is notified at the above-mentioned storage terminal Be done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2C, the member management device 162 associates the conversion time as the conversion ID with the member ID of the membership card 103 as the conversion history, and the type of the number of stored balls of the conversion source ( It has a conversion history DB that stores 4 yen ball number or 1 yen ball number) and the number of balls number converted. According to this, since the conversion history can be confirmed, it is possible to prevent a fraud or the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the member management device 162 displays a conversion upper limit setting screen on the display, which sets an upper limit when the conversion is performed. The setting contents here are transmitted to all the ball lending units 120, stored in the control unit 122 of each ball lending unit 120, and the conversion processing is executed according to the stored contents.

  Here, in the conversion upper limit setting screen shown in FIG. 3 (a), the upper limit 1 as the upper limit when converting from 4 yen storage number to 1 yen storage number is the total value of the 4 yen storage number after conversion and 1 yen storage number. Or one of the upper limit 2 “number of 1 yen balls after conversion” can be set by selecting a radio button, and at least any one of the selected upper limit 1 or 2 as an upper limit value Specific value (in this example, 250,000 balls) can be set. In addition, it is not restricted to what can choose upper limit 1 or 2 like this example, and either one may be forcedly applied without choosing upper limit 1 or 2.

  Concretely, it is possible to convert the upper limit 1 of "the sum of the number of 4 yen ball and the number of 1 yen ball after conversion" does not exceed the specific value, the number of 4 yen balls before conversion is X, If the number of stored 4 yen balls to be converted is Y and the number of stored 1 yen balls before conversion is Z, (X−Y) + 4Y + Z ≦ specified value (250,000 balls in this example) Equation 1 is satisfied It means that conversion is possible. In the left side of the equation 1, “X−Y” in the first term is the remaining number of 4-yen storage balls when converted, and becomes 0 when all are converted. Further, in the left side of Formula 1, “4Y” in the second term is the number of 1-yen balls converted from the number of 4-yen balls. Therefore, in the case of the number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2 (a), when converting all from 4 yen stored balls to 1 yen stored ball, as shown in the left column of FIG. 2 (b), about the member ID of K-00001. Since the solution of the left side of the equation 1 is 20,000 balls, conversion is possible, and for the member ID of K-00002, the solution of the left side of the equation 1 is 280,000, so conversion is not possible. Is impossible to convert because the solution on the left side of the equation 1 has 260,000 balls.

  In addition, it is possible to convert the upper limit 2 of “the number of 1 yen balls stored after conversion” does not exceed the specific value, the number of 4 yen balls before conversion is X, the number of 4 yen balls converted among X is Y In the case where the number of 1 yen balls stored before conversion is Z, conversion is possible if the formula 2 of 4Y + Z ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) is satisfied. The meaning of the first term “4Y” on the left side of the equation 2 is the same as that of the equation 1. Therefore, in the number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2 (a), when converting all from 4 yen stored balls to 1 yen stored balls, as shown in the middle column of FIG. 2 (b), about the member ID of K-00001. Since the solution of the left side of the equation 2 is 20,000 balls, conversion is possible, and for the member ID of K-00002, the solution of the left side of the equation 2 is 280,000, so conversion is not possible. Since the solution on the left side of Equation 2 results in 260,000 balls, it can not be converted.

  In the present example, the determination of the upper limit 0 is performed before the determination of the upper limit 1 or 2. This upper limit of 0 makes conversion possible when "the number of 1 yen balls converted from the number of 4 yen balls" does not exceed the specific value, and the number of 4 yen balls before conversion is X, of which X If Y is the number of 4-yen storage balls converted by Y, the process proceeds to the determination of the upper limit 1 or 2 when the formula 0 of 4Y ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) is satisfied. The meaning of “4Y” on the left side of this equation 0 is the same as in equations 1 and 2. Therefore, in the number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2 (a), although it is not shown when converting all from 4 yen stored number to 1 yen stored number, the solution ID on the left side of equation 0 is 10,000 for the member ID of K-00001. The solution for formula ID 0 on the left side is 280,000 balls for the member ID of K-00002 and the solution for formula ID 0 on the left side is about K-00003. As it becomes 240,000 balls, conversion is possible.

  Further, in the conversion upper limit setting screen shown in FIG. 3 (b), the upper limit 1 'as the upper limit when converting from 1 yen storage number to 4 yen storage number is the total value of 1 yen storage number after conversion and 4 yen storage number. ", Upper limit 2 '" 4 yen number of balls after conversion "or upper limit 0'" 4 yen number of balls converted from 1 yen number of balls "can be set by selecting a radio button, A specific value (250,000 balls in this example) can be set as the upper limit value for any one of the selected upper limits 1 'to 3'.

  Specifically, the upper limit 1 'of "the sum of the number of 1 yen and 4 yen balls after conversion" does not exceed the specific value means that the number of 1 yen balls before conversion is x. Assuming that the number of 1 yen balls to be converted out of x is y and the number of 4 yen balls before conversion is z, (x−y) + (y / 4) + z ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) It means that conversion is possible if expression 1 'of In the left side of the equation 1 ', the first term "x-y" is the number of remaining 1 yen balls when converted, and becomes 0 when all is converted. In the left side of the equation 1 ', the second term "y / 4" is the number of 4-yen balls converted from the number of 1-yen balls. Therefore, in the number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2 (a), although it is not illustrated when converting all from 1 yen stored balls to 4 yen stored balls, the solution ID of the left side of equation 1 'is 5 for member ID K-00001. Since it becomes a thousand balls, it can be converted, and the member ID of K-00002 can not be converted because the number of 1 yen balls before conversion is 0, and for the member ID of K-00003, the solution on the left side of Formula 1 'is 60,000. As it becomes 5,000 balls, conversion is possible.

  In addition, it is possible to convert the upper limit 2 'of "the number of stored 4 yen balls after conversion" does not exceed the specific value, x is the number of stored 1 yen balls before conversion, 1 of the number of stored 1 yen balls of x If y, the number of 4-yen storage balls before conversion is z, conversion is possible if (y / 4) + z ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) is satisfied. On the left side of the formula 2 ', the meaning of "y / 4" of the first term is the same as that of the formula 1'. Therefore, in the number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2 (a), although it is not illustrated when converting all from 1 yen stored balls to 4 yen stored balls, the solution ID on the left side of Formula 2 'is 5 for member ID of K-00001. Because it becomes a thousand balls, it can be converted, and the member ID of K-00002 can not be converted because the number of 1 yen balls before conversion is 0, and for the member ID of K-00003, the solution on the left side of Formula 2 'is 60,000. As it becomes 5,000 balls, conversion is possible.

  In addition, if the “4 yen ball number converted from the 1 yen ball number” at the upper limit 0 ′ does not exceed the specific value, it is possible to convert the 1 yen ball number before conversion to x among x In the case where the number of 1 yen balls is y, conversion is possible if y / 4 ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) expression 0 ′ is satisfied. The meaning of "y / 4" in the left side of this equation 0 'is the same as in equations 1' and 2 '. Therefore, in the number of balls shown in FIG. 2 (a), when converting all from 1 yen to 4 yen, it is not shown, but for the member ID of K-00001, the solution on the left side of equation 0 'is 2 Because it becomes a thousand balls, it can be converted, and the member ID of K-00002 can not be converted because the number of 1 yen balls before conversion is 0, and the member ID of K-00003 has 5,000 solutions on the left side of formula 0 '. As it becomes a ball, conversion is possible.

  The member management device 162 is not limited to one provided in the game arcade, but may be one provided outside the game arcade to manage a plurality of stores. The contents of the ball storage DB and the conversion history DB stored in the member management device 162 may be viewed from the hall computer 160 or another management device.

  Next, the pachinko machine 110 will be described. The pachinko machine 110 is an example of a game machine, and is provided corresponding to the ball lending unit 120 (here, adjacent to the right side of the ball lending unit 120) as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4A. A so-called CR type pachinko machine that pays out pachinko balls from the pachinko machine 110 according to the ball lending process or the ball reclamation process performed by the ball lending unit 120 by communicating with the corresponding ball lending unit 120. is there. The pachinko machine 110 is arranged on the game island provided in the game arcade according to the model etc. of the pachinko machine 110, and is individually identified by a unique machine number.

  The pachinko machine 110 is provided with a game area, an upper tray, a lower tray, a firing handle, and the like on the front as shown in FIG. And the card return button 116, and as shown in FIG. 1, the game control board 111, the payout control board 112, the ball payout device 113, etc. are provided internally, and these respective components are as shown in FIG. It is connected to the.

  The game control board 111 controls the gaming state of the pachinko machine 110. The payout control board 112 is communicably connected to the ball lending communication unit 121 a of the ball lending unit 120, and manages communication between the pachinko machine 110 and the ball lending unit 120. Thereby, in the ball lending process (S300 of FIG. 6) and the storage ball replaying process (S500 of FIG. 6), the exchange of signals with the ball lending unit 120 is performed. In addition, the payout control substrate 112 is connected to the ball dispensing device 113 to control the ball dispensing device 113. The ball payout device 113 pays out pachinko balls that are integral multiples of a predetermined number of units (for example, 25 balls) in ball lending processing and storage ball replaying processing, and is awarded to the player as a result of the game. It pays out pachinko balls (so-called winning balls).

  The remaining frequency display 114 is a display for displaying the remaining frequency specified from the prepaid balance recorded in the prepaid card 102 or the membership card 103 accepted by the card R / W 125 of the corresponding ball lending unit 120. There is a two-digit seven-segment display here. The remaining degree display 114 displays the remaining degree by inputting a degree display signal indicating the remaining degree from the ball lending communication unit 121a. The remaining frequency included in the frequency display signal is a quotient calculated by the formula "prepaid balance 残 100 yen".

  The ball lending button 115 accepts a ball lending operation for performing a ball lending process using the prepaid balance recorded in the prepaid card 102 or the membership card 103 accepted by the card R / W 125 of the corresponding ball lending unit 120. It is a button. When the ball lending button 115 is operated, a loan input signal is sent to the ball lending communication unit 121a via a lending input signal line provided via a detection circuit (not shown) with the ball lending communication unit 121a. Is input, and the detection circuit detects the input of the lending input signal, whereby the control unit 122 recognizes that the ball lending button 115 has been operated, and performs a ball lending process (S300 in FIG. 6).

  The card return button 116 is a button for receiving a return operation for returning the prepaid card 102 or the member card 103 received by the card R / W 125 of the corresponding ball lending unit 120. When the card return button 116 is operated, a return input signal is sent to the ball rental communication unit 121a via a return input signal line provided between the ball rental communication unit 121a and the detection circuit (not shown). Is input, and the detection circuit detects the input of the return input signal, whereby the control unit 122 recognizes that the card return button 116 has been operated, and performs a card return process (S600 in FIG. 6).

  The remaining frequency indicator 114, the ball lending button 115, and the card return button 116 described above are provided on the front surface (here, the upper plate) of the pachinko machine 110, as shown in FIG. 4A. Since it is connected to the ball lending unit 120 as shown in FIG. 1, it belongs to the ball lending unit 120 that constitutes the gaming apparatus. In addition, the ball lending button 115 and the card return button 116 may be provided in the ball lending unit 120.

  In this pachinko machine 110, when the launch handle is operated, pachinko balls in the upper tray are driven into the game area, and a game is played. When the ball hit into the game area wins the start winning opening, the variable display starts to change, and when the display result of the symbol displayed on the variable display becomes a specific mode, a big hit occurs. . In addition, when the ball is hit in the winning opening (starting winning opening, general winning opening, or a large winning opening which is opened when a big hit etc.), the winning balls are paid out from the ball payout device 113 under the control of the payout control board 112. The paid out balls are first led to the upper plate, and when the upper plate is full, it is led to the lower plate. Although not shown in the drawings, the impacted balls are collected by an out tank (not shown) provided behind the pachinko machine 110, counted by the impacted ball counter, and taken into the game island after being counted.

  Next, the configuration of the ball lending unit 120 will be described. The ball lending unit 120 is an example of a gaming machine, and as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4B, corresponding to the pachinko machine 110 which is a gaming machine (here, adjacent to the left side of the pachinko machine 110) 4 (a), provided with a bill insertion slot 123a, a projecting portion 120a, a card insertion slot 25a, etc. on its front surface, as shown in FIG. 4 (a). As shown in b), the bill discrimination machine 123, the ball lending communication unit 121a, the indoor communication unit 121b, the control unit 122, the card R / W 125, the prepaid card stocker 125b, etc. The touch panel display 124 is provided on the side (that is, the side facing the player), and these respective components are connected as shown in FIG.

  The ball lending communication unit 121a is communicably connected to the payout control board 112 of the pachinko machine 110, as described above. The indoor communication unit 121b is communicably connected to the hall computer 160, the balance management device 161, and the member management device 162 via the island computer 163 as shown in FIG. It is responsible for communication between the parties.

  The control unit 122 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, an EEPROM, and the like, and each component provided to the ball lending unit 120 by the processing program stored in the ROM being executed by the CPU with the RAM as a work area. Controls various operations. Although not shown, the RAM of the control unit 122 stores the card ID read from the prepaid card 102 or the membership card 103 accepted by the card R / W 125 and the prepaid balance.

  In the RAM of the control unit 122, as shown in FIG. 5, a ball storage table is stored. In this ball storage table, the number of balls stored in the member management device 162 in association with the member ID of the member card 103 received by the card R / W 125 (in this example, 4 yen ball number and 1 yen ball number) is lent. It is stored for each rate. This ball storage table functions as a possessing value storage means for storing the number of possessed balls, which is the possessing value, for each lending rate when the possessing value is lent. The stored contents of this ball storage table are updated as follows.

  First, when the membership card 103 is received and the collation processing (S100 in FIG. 6) is performed, the member ID read from the membership card 103 and the input personal identification number are sent from the ball lending unit 120 to the member management device 162. Is sent to the member management apparatus 162, the collation with the member ID and password stored in the ball storage DB is performed, and if the collation result is OK, it is stored in association with the member ID. The number of stored balls (4 yen number of stored balls and 1 yen number of stored balls) is returned to the ball lending unit 120, and the member ID and the returned number of balls are stored in the ball pool table of the ball lending unit 120 .

  In addition, when the ball replay processing (S500 in FIG. 6) is performed, the number of used balls provided for the replay of the balls from the stored number of balls (the number of four yen balls or the number of one yen balls) stored in the ball table. Is subtracted. Then, the ball subtraction request including the member ID and the number of used balls is transmitted from the ball lending unit 120 to the member management device 162.

  Furthermore, when the conversion process (S400 in FIG. 6) is performed, the number of stored balls to be converted is subtracted from the stored number of stored balls (for example, 4 yen number of stored balls) in the stored ball table, and the other number of stored balls (for example, 1) The number of balls converted into the number of yen balls is added. Then, the ball subtraction request including the member ID and the number of balls to be converted, and the ball addition request including the member ID and the number of converted balls are transmitted from the ball lending unit 120 to the member management apparatus 162.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (b), the bill validator 123 receives the insertion of a bill (1000 yen bill, 2000 yen bill, 5000 yen bill or 10000 yen bill) from the bill insertion slot 123a, and identifies the bill. It is The identified bill is transported in the bill passage 123b provided behind the bill discriminating device 123, taken into the game island, and collected in the safe provided at the end of the game island through the conveyance path provided in the game island. Be done.

  The touch panel display 124 is a display device that displays various types of information and is an input device that receives input of various types of information. On the display 124, as shown at D00 in FIG. 6, while the member card 103 is being received, a “conversion button” that receives a conversion operation and a “ball storage replay button” that receives a storage ball replay operation are displayed. The other display contents of the display 124 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the card R / W 125 receives the insertion of the prepaid card 102 from the card insertion slot 125a and reads the card ID and the prepaid balance from the prepaid card 102, and the card insertion slot When the insertion of the membership card 103 is accepted from 125a, the card ID and the prepaid balance and the membership ID are read from the membership card 103. The prepaid card stocker 125b is provided behind the card R / W 125, and stores a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prepaid cards 102. In this prepaid card stocker 125b, a prepaid card 102 for which a ball lending process has been performed and the prepaid balance has become zero is taken in and stored. Further, in a state in which the prepaid card 102 is not received by the card R / W 125, when a bill is received by the bill validator 123, one of the prepaid cards 102 stored in the prepaid card stocker 125b is The card R / W 125 is conveyed from the prepaid card stocker 125 b to the card R / W 125, and the card R / W 125 reads a card ID from the set prepaid card 102.

  Next, the operation of the ball lending unit 120 will be described. In the following, an example will be described in which the lending rate (ball lending rate) of the ball lending unit 120 is 1 yen, and conversion from 4 yen to 1 yen is performed in the conversion process.

  First, FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing under sales performed by the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120. The control unit 122 waits for acceptance of the prepaid card 102 or membership card 103 by the card R / W 125 in S01, waits for acceptance of a banknote by the bill validator in S02, and operates the ball lending button 115 in S03. In S04, the operation of the conversion button is waited, in S05, the operation of the ball replay button is waited, and in S06, the operation of the card return button 116 is waited, and the loop of S01 to S06 is repeated.

  When the control unit 122 determines that the acceptance of the prepaid card 102 or the membership card 103 is present (YES) in S01, the control processing of S100 is performed, and it is determined that the acceptance of banknotes is present (YES) in S02. In step S200, the deposit process of S200 is performed, and when it is determined that the ball lending button 115 is operated (YES) in S03, the ball lending process is performed in S300, and the conversion button is operated in S04 (YES) If it is determined, the conversion process (FIG. 7) is performed in S400, and if it is determined in S05 that there is an operation of the ball replay button (YES), the ball replay process (FIG. 8) is performed in S500, If it is determined in S06 that the card return button 116 is operated (YES), card return processing is performed in S600. After the processes of S100, S200, S300, S400, S500, and S600, the process returns to the loop of S01 to S06.

  Here, in the verification process of S100, when the prepaid card 102 is received, the balance verification process is performed. This balance check processing transmits the received card ID and prepaid balance from the received prepaid card 102 to the balance management device 161, and transmits the transmitted card ID, card ID stored in the prepaid balance and balance DB, and the like. It is a process of waiting for a reply of the collation result from the balance management device 161 which carries out collation with the prepaid balance, storing the prepaid balance in the RAM if the collation result is OK, and discharging the prepaid card 102 if it is NG.

  When the membership card 103 is received, the balance verification process is performed and the number of balls comparison process is performed. This balance verification process transmits the card ID and the prepaid balance read from the received membership card 103 to the balance management device 161, and transmits the transmitted card ID and the card ID stored in the prepaid balance and balance DB. A process of waiting for a reply of the collation result from the balance management device 161 which performs collation with the prepaid balance, storing the read prepaid balance in the RAM if the collation result is OK, and discharging the member card 103 if it is NG It is. Further, the number-of-balls matching process receives the input of the personal identification number, transmits the member ID read from the received member card 103 and the input personal identification number to the member management apparatus 162, and transmits the transmitted member ID And it waits for the reply of the collation result from the member management device 162 which performs collation with the member ID and the personal identification number stored in the balls DB and the personal identification number, and if the collation result is OK, it is transmitted from the member management device 162 The number of stored balls (the number of 4-yen balls and the number of 1-yen balls) is stored in the ball table of the RAM, and if it is NG, the member card 103 is discharged.

  In the deposit process of S200, if the identification of the accepted bill is NG, the bill is ejected, and if OK, it is determined whether or not the card (the prepaid card 102 or the membership card 103) is being accepted, and if it is being accepted. The card ID of the card and the deposit amount, which is the amount of the identified bill, are transmitted to the balance management device 161, and if it is not accepted, the prepaid card 102 is transported from the prepaid card stocker 125b to the card R / W 125 The card ID is read, and the read card ID and the payment amount are transmitted to the balance management device 161, and the payment amount transmitted to the prepaid balance stored in the balance DB in association with the transmitted card ID. Waits for the notification of completion of addition from the remaining amount management device 161 that performs processing of adding the above, and when the notification of completion of addition is received, the accepted banknote Uptake in the game island, adding the pre-fill amount of money to the prepaid balance which is stored in the RAM, to record the prepaid balance after the addition to the card.

  In the ball lending process of S300, the amount used (in the case where the prepaid balance exceeds the predetermined ball lending setting amount, it is the ball lending setting amount, and in the case where the prepaid balance does not exceed the ball lending setting amount The pachinko ball of the prepaid balance is paid out from the corresponding pachinko machine 110, the usage amount is subtracted from the prepaid balance stored in the RAM, and the prepaid balance after the subtraction is recorded on the card. If the card being accepted is the prepaid card 102 and the prepaid balance after subtraction is zero, the prepaid card 102 is stored in the card stocker 125 b.

  The conversion process of S400 will be described later with reference to FIG. 8 and the storage ball replay process of S500 of FIG. In the card return process of S600, the card being accepted (the prepaid card 102 or the membership card 103 is returned).

  Here, while the deposit process, the ball lending process, and the ball re-playing process are being performed, the execution of the conversion process is limited. Specifically, even if the operation of the conversion button is accepted, it is invalidated. According to this, the ownership value (the number of balls stored in the ball table) is changed by the conversion process being performed while the deposit process, the ball lending process, and the ball replaying process are being performed. It is possible to prevent the situation that people are confused. When the gaming machine is an enclosed type pachinko machine, the execution of the conversion process is limited even while the pachinko ball is being fired.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of conversion processing which is a subroutine performed by the control unit 122. If it is determined that the operation of the “conversion button” displayed on the touch panel display 124 is present (YES) at step S101, the control unit 122 is receiving the membership card 103 and at step S101, Perform lock processing of ball lending, storage ball replay and card return. Specifically, even if the bill validator 123 does not accept a bill, the operation of the ball lending button 115, the ball replay button or the card return button 116 is invalidated. According to this, it is possible to prevent the situation that the possessive value (prepaid balance stored and the number of stored balls stored in the ball table) change during conversion and the player is confused. In addition, when the gaming machine is an enclosed type pachinko machine, the firing of the pachinko ball is also locked.

  Next, at S 102, the display 124 is made to display a ball number display before conversion. In this pre-conversion ball number display, as shown in D102 of FIG. 9, it is displayed that payment, ball lending, storage ball replay, and card return can not be locked in S101, and the first possession before conversion is displayed. The first display unit number (the number of 2000 ball dollar boxes) converted by “2000 balls” which is the predetermined display unit, and the second before the conversion. The second display unit number (the number of 2000 dollar boxes) converted by “2000 balls” which is the predetermined display unit is displayed. . Here, the "predetermined display unit" is a unit for converting so that the player can easily grasp the amount of possession possessed by the player, and in this example, is "2000 balls". In addition, the part whose converted value is less than 2000 balls is displayed by a dollar box smaller than the 2000 balls. Therefore, in this example, one dollar box of 2000 balls and one small dollar box representing 1000 balls are displayed as the first display unit number, and four dollar boxes of 2000 balls are displayed as the second display unit number. Ru. In addition, the dollar box is displayed in white in the before-conversion ball number display. Further, as a button for receiving the setting of the number of converted balls, a “specifying button” for specifying the number of 4-yen balls to be converted and a “all button” for converting all the number of 4-yen balls are displayed. Here, the “designation button” functions as a receiving unit that receives the specification of the first owned value to be converted by the conversion unit. Then, in S103, the operation of the "designation button" is waited, and in S104, the operation of the "all button" is waited.

  If the "all button" operation is performed in S104 (YES), it is determined in S105 whether or not the number of stored balls after conversion is within the upper limit range set in FIG. 3A. Here, first, it is determined whether the upper limit 0 is satisfied, and if the upper limit 0 is satisfied, it is determined whether the upper limit 1 or 2 is satisfied. According to this, since the upper limit 1 or 2 is not satisfied when the upper limit 0 is not satisfied, it is not necessary to determine whether the upper limit 1 or 2 is satisfied.

  If it is determined that the number of stored balls after conversion is not within the upper limit (NO), that is, the upper limit 0 is not satisfied, or the upper limit 0 is satisfied but the upper limit 1 or 2 is not satisfied, S106 is not possible. Then, the display 124 displays the conversion impossible display 1 on the display 124. In this conversion impossible display 1, although not shown, the fact that the number of stored balls after conversion exceeds the upper limit indicates that the conversion can not be performed, the "designation button", and the "cancel button" for stopping conversion. Then, in S110, the operation of the "specify button" is waited, and in S111, the operation of the "cancel button" is waited. If the "designation button" is operated at S110 (YES), the process proceeds to S112, and if the "cancel button" is operated at S111 (YES), the conversion process is ended.

  As described above, the conversion is not executed unless the number of stored balls after conversion is within the set upper limit, so it is possible to prevent the storage amount of the number of stored balls from excessively increasing with the conversion.

  In the non-conversion display 1 of S106, the permitted number of balls may be notified so that the number of stored balls after conversion is within the set upper limit. For example, 4 yen ball number is 60,000 balls, 1 yen ball number is 20,000 balls, "the sum of 4 yen ball number after conversion and 1 yen ball number after conversion is set to 250,000 balls or less after the upper limit 1" If the number of 4-yen storage balls is completely converted, the solution on the left side of the equation 1 is 260,000, so conversion is not possible. However, if 56,000 balls of 4-yen storage balls are converted, the above-mentioned equation (1) Since the solution on the left side is 248,000 balls and conversion is possible, the 56,000 balls are notified as the allowable ball number. The display 124 that reports the allowable number of balls functions as a notification unit that reports the first possession value (the number of allowable balls) that satisfies the conversion condition. According to this, since the conversion can be made as much as possible, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  If it is determined in S105 that the number of stored balls after conversion is within the upper limit (YES), that is, it is determined that the upper limit 0 and 1 or the upper limits 0 and 2 are satisfied and conversion is possible, the converted number of balls is displayed in S109. Is displayed on the display 124. In this converted number-of-balls display, as shown in D109 of FIG. 9, the first owned value 4-yen ball number (0 ball in this example) after conversion is a predetermined display unit "2000 balls". The first display unit number (the number of 2000 dollar boxes) and the number of 1 yen balls (2000 balls in this example), which are the second ownership value after conversion, are the predetermined display units. The second display unit number (the number of 2000 dollar boxes) converted at “2000 balls” is displayed. In this example, since all conversion is performed, no dollar box is displayed as the first display unit number, and ten dollar boxes of 2000 balls are displayed as the second display unit number. Also, in the converted ball number display, the dollar box is displayed in black. In addition, an "execute button" for executing conversion and the "cancel button" are displayed. Then, in S116, the operation of the "execution button" is waited, and in S117, the operation of the "cancel button" is waited. If the "cancel button" is operated in S117 (YES), the conversion process is ended.

  If there is an operation on the “execute button” in S116 (YES), conversion is executed in S118, and the display during conversion is displayed on the display 124. If conversion is executed here, (a) 4 yen ball number 3000 balls before conversion, 1 circle ball number 8000 balls, (b) 4 yen ball number 0 balls after conversion, 1 in the ball table shown in FIG. 5 The number of yen balls is 20,000. At the same time, communication with the member management device 162 is performed, the same conversion is performed also in the ball storage DB shown in FIG. 2, and the conversion history is stored in the conversion history DB shown in FIG. Ru. As described above, since the conversion is performed in the ball lending unit 120, the processing load on the member management device 162 can be reduced. Further, in the display during conversion, as shown by D118a in FIG. 9, the fact that conversion is in progress is displayed by blinking of characters and arrows.

  In S119, the end of conversion is waited, and when the conversion is completed (YES), in S120, the lock made on the deposit, ball lending, storage ball replay and card return performed in S101 is released, and the conversion end display is displayed. It is displayed on the display 124. In this conversion end display, as shown at D120a in FIG. 9, the character indicating that the conversion is completed, and the number of first display units and the number of second display units after conversion are displayed as in the case of D109. Then, in S121, the process waits for the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and when the predetermined time has elapsed (YES), the conversion process is ended.

  When the designation of the number of balls to be converted is received on the number-of-balls designation screen (not shown) when the "designation button" is operated in S103, the number of 4-yen balls stored in the ball table is S112. It is judged whether it is more than the designated number of balls. If it is determined in S112 that the 4-yen storage ball number is not equal to or more than the designated ball number (NO), the conversion impossible display 2 is displayed on the display 124 in S113. In this conversion impossible display 2, although it is not illustrated, the fact that conversion is not possible because the number of 4-yen storage balls is not equal to or more than the specified number of balls, and the "cancel button" is displayed. Then, in S114, the operation of the "cancel button" is waited. If the "cancel button" is operated in S114 (YES), the conversion process is ended. Also in the conversion impossible display 2, as in the case of the conversion impossible display 1, the "designation button" is displayed, and if there is an operation of the "designation button", the process proceeds to S112 to receive re-designation of the number of balls to be converted. You may

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S112 that the 4-yen storage ball number is equal to or greater than the designated ball number (YES), the converted ball number display is displayed on the display 124 in S115. In this converted number-of-balls display, as in D109 of FIG. 9, as shown in D115, the first owned value number of 4-yen balls (2000 balls in this example) after conversion is a predetermined display unit The number of display units (number of 2,000 dollar boxes) converted by “2000 balls”, and the number of 1 yen balls stored in this example (12,000 balls in this example) The second display unit number (the number of 2000 dollar boxes) converted by the predetermined display unit “2000 balls” is displayed. In this example, since one conversion is performed, one dollar box of 2000 balls is displayed as the first display unit number, and six dollar boxes of 2000 balls are displayed as the second display unit number. Also, in the converted ball number display, the dollar box is displayed in black. In addition, an "execute button" for executing conversion and the "cancel button" are displayed. Then, in S116, the operation of the "execution button" is waited, and in S117, the operation of the "cancel button" is waited. If the "cancel button" is operated in S117 (YES), the conversion process is ended.

  If there is an operation on the “execute button” in S116 (YES), conversion is executed in S118, and the display during conversion is displayed on the display 124. If conversion is executed here, (a) 4 yen ball number 3000 balls before conversion, 1 yen ball number 8000 balls are not shown, but 4 yen ball number 2000 balls after conversion, 1 in the ball table shown in FIG. The number of yen balls is 12,000. At the same time, communication with the member management device 162 is performed, and the same conversion is performed in the ball storage DB shown in FIG. 2A, and in the conversion history DB shown in FIG. Is stored. As described above, since the conversion is performed in the ball lending unit 120, the processing load on the member management device 162 can be reduced. Further, in the display during conversion, as shown by D118b in FIG. 9, the message that conversion is in progress is displayed by blinking characters and arrows.

  In the above example, when the conversion is performed, a ball subtraction request and a ball addition request are transmitted from the ball lending unit 120 to the member management device 162, and the ball subtraction request is a prize exchange process or a ball replaying process. It is described that the request for addition of balls is the same as that transmitted in the ball processing, but the contents transmitted by communication with the member management apparatus 162 are converted. It may be any content that can identify the effect. For example, if 4 yen ball number 3000 balls before conversion, 1 yen ball number 8000 balls become 4 yen ball number 2000 balls after conversion, 1 yen ball number 12000 balls, 4 yen ball balls as a first example A conversion signal is sent by subtracting (using) several thousand balls and adding (reserving) 4,000 balls per one yen, or as a second example, converting processing by subtracting (using) four thousand balls as many as 1,000 balls. In the third example, a conversion result signal indicating that the number of 4-yen storage balls after conversion is 2000 balls and the number of 1-yen storage balls is 12000 balls may be transmitted as a third example.

  Then, the member management device 162 updates the ball storage DB based on these signals. The member management device 162 transmits the updated number of balls to the ball lending unit 120, and if the number of balls after the updating does not match the number of balls stored in the ball table of the ball lending unit 120, It may be an error.

  In S119, the end of conversion is waited, and when the conversion is completed (YES), in S120, the lock made on the deposit, ball lending, storage ball replay and card return performed in S101 is released, and the conversion end display is displayed. It is displayed on the display 124. In this conversion end display, as indicated by D120b in FIG. 9, as in D120b, characters indicating that conversion is completed, and the number of first display units and the number of second display units after conversion are the same as in D115. Is displayed. Then, in S121, the process waits for the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and when the predetermined time has elapsed (YES), the conversion process is ended.

  In FIG. 7 described above, although the example in which the lending rate of the ball lending unit 120 is 1 yen and the conversion from 4 yen to 1 yen has been described, the lending rate of the ball lending unit 120 is 4 yen, 1 In the case where the circle is converted to 4 yen, after YES in S105 or S112, if the specified number of balls in the total of 1 yen ball number or 1 yen ball number is converted to 4 yen ball number in S107 (Ie, when the number of 1 yen balls to be converted is divided by 4), it is determined whether or not the 4 yen number of balls has a fraction following the decimal point. If it is determined in S107 that no fraction is output (NO), the process proceeds to S109 or S115.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fraction is to be output (YES), the conversion impossible display 3 is displayed on the display 124 in S108. In this conversion impossible display 3, although not shown, the fact that conversion is not possible because the converted 4-yen storage ball number has a fraction, the "designation button", and the "cancel button" are displayed. For example, if 1 yen ball number 10001 balls are converted, 4 yen ball number will be 2500.25, and if 1 yen ball number 10002 is converted, 4 yen ball number will be 2500.5, and 1 yen ball number 10003 If you convert, the number of 4 yen balls will be 2500.75, and in any case, it will not be converted because the fraction comes out. Then, in S110, the operation of the "designation button" is waited, and in the S111, the operation of the "cancel button" is waited.

  In addition, when the fraction goes out, the maximum value without the fraction out of the number of 1 yen balls to be converted is converted into the number of 4 yen balls based on the acceptance of the conversion execution operation from the player or automatically. You may do it. Specifically, 10000 balls of the 1-yen ball number of 10001 balls may be converted into 2500 4-yen ball numbers and the remaining 1-yen ball number of 1 ball. Note that instead of converting the maximum value, it may be possible to select and convert a multiple (eg, a multiple of 100 balls) that does not have a fraction.

  FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the storage ball replay process, which is a subroutine performed by the control unit 122. In the following, an example will be described in which 200 pachinko balls are paid out from the pachinko machine 110 in one pooling replay process in the case of a lending rate of 1 yen. In addition, the number of pachinko balls paid out by one time of the ball re-play processing is not limited to 200 balls. In addition, in the ball replay processing, pachinko balls are not limited to those paid out only from the pachinko machine 110, but those paid out only from the ball lending unit 120, and those paid out from the pachinko machine 110 and the ball lending unit 120. May be

  If the control unit 122 is accepting the membership card 103 and it is determined in S05 that there is an operation of the "reserved ball replay button" displayed on the touch panel display 124 (YES), then in S201, It is determined whether the number of 1 yen balls stored in the ball storage table is 200 balls or more. If it is determined in S201 that the number of 1 yen balls is 200 or more (YES), in S202, the pachinko machine 110 is instructed to pay out 200 balls of pachinko balls, and in S203, it is stored in the ball table By subtracting 200 balls from the number of 1 yen balls stored, and sending a use signal indicating that 200 balls have been subtracted (used) to the member management device 162, the ball replay processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the number of 1 yen balls is not 200 or more (NO), it is determined in S204 whether the number of 4 yen balls stored in the ball storage table is present. If it is determined in S204 that there is no 4 yen number of balls stored (NO), the display 124 is made to display a pool non-replay impossible display in S205, and the pool re-play processing is ended. In this reservoir non-replay display, it is displayed that the reservoir replay can not be performed because the number of 1-yen reservoir is insufficient and the number of 4-yen reservoirs is not available.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S204 that there is a 4-yen storage ball number (YES), in S206, a conversion indication is displayed on the display 124. In this conversion suggestion display, as shown in D206, since the number of 1-yen storage balls is insufficient, a message is displayed asking whether to convert from the number of 4-yen storage balls or not. Also, a "do not convert" button for not executing conversion and a "convert to button" for executing conversion are displayed. And in S207, operation of "the button which does not convert" is waited, and in S208, operation of the "button to convert" is waited. If there is an operation on the “unconverted button” in S207 (YES), the storage ball replay processing ends.

  On the other hand, if there is an operation on the "convert button" in S208 (YES), the process proceeds to S101 of the conversion processing described in FIG. 7, and conversion from 4-yen storage number to 1-yen storage number is performed. Then, after completion of the conversion process, the ball replay button is operated again, and the process proceeds to S201 of the ball replay process described with reference to FIG. 8. If the converted number of 1 yen balls is 200 balls or more, pachinko in S202 The balls are paid out.

[2. Second embodiment]
The gaming system 1 according to the first embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the operation of the ball lending unit 120. In the first embodiment, the “conversion button” is displayed on the menu screen at D00 in FIG. 6, and when the conversion button is operated (YES in S04), the conversion process (S400) is performed, and one loan rate ( For example, although the example of converting the designated number of balls or all of the owning value of 4 yen) into the owning value of the other lending rate (e.g. 1 yen) "in bulk" (ie, batch conversion) has been described In form, in D00 when the “conversion button” is not displayed on the menu screen and there is an operation of the “reserved ball replay button” and the value of ownership of the present loan rate is insufficient, possession of the one loan rate The designated number of balls of the value is converted (that is, converted each time) to the owning value of the other lending rate “at each time”. Even if conversion is performed each time, the input of the personal identification number is performed only once when the membership card 103 is received, and the input of the personal identification number is not required each time conversion.

  FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the storage ball re-play processing, which is a subroutine performed by the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit in the gaming system 1 according to the second embodiment. In the following, as in the first embodiment, an example will be described in which 200 pachinko balls are paid out from the pachinko machine 110 in a single storage ball replay process in the case of a lending rate of 1 yen.

  If the control unit 122 is accepting the membership card 103 and it is determined in S05 of FIG. 6 that there is an operation of the “reserved ball replay button” displayed on the touch panel display 124 (YES), Although it progresses to S201, since this S201-S208 are the same as that of FIG. 8 of 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  If there is an operation of the “convert button” in S208 (YES), lock processing of deposit, ball lending, storage ball replay and card return is performed in S101 as in the first embodiment. Next, at S 102 ′, the display 124 is made to display a ball number display before conversion. In this pre-conversion ball number display, as shown in D102 'of FIG. 11, it is displayed that payment, ball lending, storage ball replay and card return can not be locked in S101, and the first before conversion The first display unit number (the number of 2000 dollar boxes) converted by “2000 balls” which is the predetermined display unit, and the number before the conversion. The second display unit number (number of 2000 ball dollar boxes) converted by “2000 balls”, which is the display value of 1 yen, which is the possession value of 2 (for example, 0 balls), is displayed. Ru. In addition, the part whose converted value is less than 2000 balls is displayed by a dollar box smaller than the 2000 balls. Therefore, in this example, one dollar box of 2000 balls and one small dollar box representing 1000 balls are displayed as the first display unit number, and no dollar box is displayed as the second display unit number. In addition, the dollar box is displayed in white in the before-conversion ball number display.

  In addition, as a button for accepting the setting of the conversion ball number, “50 ball button” which converts 50 ball 4 yen ball number, and “500 ball button” which converts 500 ball 4 yen ball number are displayed. Ru. The reason why the 50-ball button is provided here is that if the number of 4-yen storage balls of the 50 balls is converted, it becomes 1-yen storage number of 200 balls and one-time reservoir replay can be performed. The reason is that when the number of 4-yen storage balls of 500 balls is converted, the number of 1-yen storage balls of 2000 balls is obtained, and it is possible to perform the reservoir replay 10 times. In addition, the number of balls set by these is not limited to 50 balls or 500 balls, and may be another number of balls, and as shown in D102 of FIG. 9, the "designated button" or "all button" May be provided. Then, in S103 ', the operation of "50 ball button" or "500 ball button" is on standby.

  If there is an operation of "50 ball button" or "500 ball button" in S103 '(YES), whether the number of 4-yen balls stored in the ball table in S112' is equal to or more than the specified number of balls It is determined whether or not. In addition, even in the case of YES in S103 ′, the number of times specified in the button is not to execute the process of S105 in the first embodiment (determining whether the number of stored balls after conversion is within the upper limit). Is 50 balls or 500 balls, the equation 0 is satisfied first, and the equation 1 or 2 is also satisfied.

  If it is determined in S112 'that the 4-yen storage ball number is not equal to or more than the specified ball number (NO), then in S113, the display 124 is displayed with the conversion impossible display 2 similar to the first embodiment. Then, in S114, the operation of the "cancel button" is waited, and if there is an operation of the "cancel button" (YES), the storage ball replay processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S112 'that the 4-yen storage ball number is equal to or more than the designated ball number (YES), the converted ball number display is displayed on the display 124 in S115'. In this converted number-of-balls display, as shown in D115 'of FIG. 11 (when the 500-ball button is operated), the number of 4-yen storage balls (2500 balls in this example) which is the first possession value after conversion is The first display unit number (the number of 2000 dollar boxes) converted by the predetermined display unit “2000 balls” and the number of 1 yen balls (the second example of the converted possession value (in this example) The second display unit number (the number of 2000 dollar boxes) converted by “2000 balls” which is a predetermined display unit is displayed. In this example, as the first display unit number, one 2000 dollar box and one 500 dollar box are displayed, and as the second display unit number, one 2000 dollar box is displayed. Also, in the converted ball number display, the dollar box is displayed in black. In addition, an "execute button" for executing conversion and the "cancel button" are displayed. Then, as in the first embodiment, in S116, the operation of the "execution button" is on standby, and in S117, the operation of the "cancel button" is on standby. If there is an operation on the "cancel button" in this S117 (YES), the storage ball replay processing ends.

  Although not shown, when the 50-ball button is operated instead of the 500-ball button, the first display in which the number of 4-yen storage balls (2950 balls in this example), which is the first ownership value after conversion, is converted. As a unit number, one dollar box of 2000 balls and one small dollar box representing 950 balls are displayed, and the second possession value after conversion, ie, the number of 1 yen balls stored (200 balls in this example) is converted. As a second display unit number, one small dollar box representing 200 balls is displayed.

  If the "execute button" is operated in S116 (YES), conversion is executed in S118, and the display during conversion is displayed on the display 124, as in the first embodiment. If conversion is executed here, (a) 4 yen ball number 3000 balls before conversion, 1 yen ball number 0 ball is not shown, but 4 yen ball number 2500 balls after conversion, 1 The number of yen balls is 2000. At the same time, communication with the member management device 162 is performed, the same conversion is performed also in the ball storage DB shown in FIG. 2, and the conversion history is stored in the conversion history DB shown in FIG. Ru. In addition, in the display during conversion, as indicated by D118 in FIG. 11, the fact that conversion is in progress is displayed by blinking characters and arrows.

  In S119, the end of conversion is awaited, and when the conversion is completed (YES), in S120 ', the lock on the deposit, ball lending, storage ball replay and card return made in S101 is released, and conversion end display Is displayed on the display 124. In this conversion end display, as shown at D120 'in FIG. 11, the character indicating that the conversion has ended, and the number of first display units and the number of second display units after conversion are displayed as in the case of D115'. Then, as in the first embodiment, in S121, the process waits for the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and proceeds to S202 when the predetermined time has elapsed (YES).

  The CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the processing of S102 and S109 or S115 in the first embodiment described above and performs the processing of S102 ′ and S115 ′ in the second embodiment performs the first processing before conversion. The first display unit number (number of 2000 dollar boxes) converted by the display unit (2000 balls) with the owning value (4 yen number of balls), and the second owning value (1 yen coin) after conversion The unit functions as a unit number display means for displaying the second display unit number (the number of 2000 dollar boxes) converted in the predetermined display unit. According to this, the first number of display units obtained by converting the first ownership value before conversion in a predetermined display unit and the second number of conversions after the conversion are converted in a predetermined display unit Since the number of display units is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize how much the game is possible based on the possession value of the other loan rate after conversion.

  In this example, when the first owning value (4 yen number of balls) is converted to the second owning value (1 yen number of balls), the first owning value before conversion and the second owning value are converted Although the first display unit number and the second display unit number obtained by converting the first ownership value and the second ownership value after conversion are displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. The second display unit number may be displayed as long as the first display unit number to which the first ownership value before conversion is converted and the second display unit number to which the second ownership value after conversion is converted. It is not necessary to display the second display unit number in which the ownership value of the second display unit has been converted and the first display unit number to which the first ownership value after conversion has been converted. In this example, the first display unit number before conversion and the second display unit number after conversion are displayed on separate screens. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first display unit number and the second display unit number are described. The number of display units may be displayed on the same screen.

  In addition, in the unit number display, since the display mode of the first display unit number (white dollar box) and the display mode of the second display unit number (black dollar box) are different, it is the first possession value before conversion It can be easily recognized whether it is the second ownership value after conversion. In addition, the display mode of the first display unit number and the display mode of the second display unit number may be different, and it is not particularly limited in any manner. For example, display brightness and darkness, etc., one having a different design or size before and after conversion, or one with light and the other with flicker may be used. Furthermore, the display mode of the first display unit number and the display mode of the second display unit number may not be different.

  In addition, the CPU of the control unit 122 that performs display during conversion in S118 and the display 124 function as a specific effect execution unit that executes a specific effect (displaying that conversion is in progress by blinking characters and arrows) when conversion is performed. It is According to this, it can be easily understood that the conversion of the number of stored balls is performed. The specific effect is not particularly limited as long as it is performed when the conversion is performed. For example, not only the display but also a specific effect by voice may be used.

  Moreover, although the example which can convert the number of balls of other loan rates into the number of balls of the loan rate of this base was demonstrated in FIG.7 and 10 demonstrated above, the number of balls of the loan rate of this base was It may be possible to convert it into the number of balls of the loan rate. According to this, during the game in the ball lending unit 120 of the lending rate of 1 yen, the number of 1 yen balls is converted to the number of 4 yen balls, for example, the ball lending unit 120 of the lending rate of 4 yen after moving by one. Can be prepared for

  Next, modified examples of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above will be described.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the first display unit number before conversion and the conversion after conversion are the display of the number of balls before conversion (for example, D102 in FIG. 9) and the number display of balls after conversion (for example, D109 in FIG. 9) Although the second display unit number of has been described as being converted and displayed in the same display unit (2000 balls), the present invention is not limited thereto. The first display unit number before conversion and the second display unit after conversion The number may be converted and displayed in different display units. For example, when converting the number of 4-yen storage balls into the number of 1-yen storage balls, the number of stored balls after conversion is quadrupled, and with 2000 balls, the number of second display units may be too large to be seen. The second display unit number converted in dollar box may be displayed.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, although the example of performing the conversion of the number of balls in the ball lending unit 120 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the member management device 162 performs the conversion of the number of balls. The member management apparatus 162 in this case includes the conversion means.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, an example in which all the processes of deposit, ball lending, storage ball replay, and card return are locked in S101 of FIG. 7 has been described. It may lock only the process of Moreover, although the example which does not perform conversion is demonstrated during processing of money_receiving | payment, ball lending, and ball storage replay, conversion may not be performed only during processing of a part of these.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown in S105 of FIG. 7, it is determined whether or not the number of stored balls after conversion is within the range of the upper limit, and an example in which conversion is accepted if within the range of the upper limit has been described. However, it may be determined whether or not the number of stored balls after conversion is within a predetermined lower limit, and conversion may be accepted if within the range of the lower limit. For example, even if it converts from 4 yen number of balls to 1 yen number of balls, if it is less than the number of 1 yen number of balls paid out (200 balls in this example), it can not be paid out even if it is converted. Do not allow conversion because of poor sex.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, in the non-conversion display 1 shown in S106 of FIG. 7, an example in which the allowable number of balls is notified so that the number of stored balls after conversion is within the set upper limit Although it demonstrated, you may make it alert | report not only this but also in the conversion impossible display 3 shown to S108, the number of accept | permitted balls. Then, in these non-conversion displays 1 and 3, a "conversion button for the number of allowed balls" may be displayed on the display 124, and when the button is operated, the number of allowed balls may be converted.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, it is determined in S107 of FIG. 7 whether the upper limit 0 (for example, that the number of 1 yen balls converted from the number of 4 yen balls does not exceed the specific value) is satisfied. Then, the upper limit 1 (the sum of the converted number of 4 yen and the number of 1 yen balls does not exceed the specified value) or the upper limit 2 (the number of converted 1 yen balls does not exceed the specified value) Although the example which determines whether it is whether or not it demonstrated, without being limited to this, you may determine whether the upper limit 1 or the upper limit 2 is satisfy | filled, without determining whether the upper limit 0 is satisfy | filled.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, as shown in S109 and S115 of FIG. 7, the example in which the converted ball number display is performed before S118 in which conversion is actually performed is described. The present invention is not limited to this, and the converted ball number display may not be performed in S109 or S115, and the converted ball number display may be performed only in S120 after the conversion is actually performed in S118.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, when it is determined in S204 of FIG. 8 that the owning value of another loan rate (in this example, the number of 4-yen balls is stored), the conversion indication is displayed in S206. Although the described example has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and conversion suggestion display may be performed in S206 when it is determined in S204 that there is a predetermined number or more of ownership values of other loan rates. Here, the predetermined number may be a number such that the number of 1-yen storage balls after conversion is 200 balls or more to be paid out in one storage-ball replay process, for example, if the number of 1-yen storage balls before conversion is 0 For example, the predetermined number is 50, and if the number of 1 yen balls stored before conversion is 80, the predetermined number is 30. According to this, since the conversion indication is not displayed when the number of 4-yen storage balls to be converted is insufficient, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, as shown in D102 of FIG. 9 and D102 ′ of FIG. 11, among the converted values obtained by converting the owned value by a predetermined display unit (2000 balls in this example) Although an example in which a portion less than the display unit is represented by a dollar box smaller than the dollar box of the display unit has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, in a dollar box of the same size as the 2000 dollar box May be displayed so as to be smaller than 2000 balls, and in this case, it is preferable that the display of the ball amount changes in proportion to the numerical value.

  In the second embodiment described above, an example is described in which pachinko balls are paid out without the play of the ball after the predetermined time has elapsed in S121 of FIG. 10, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When the time passes, the ball re-playing process may be temporarily ended without disbursing the pachinko balls, and if there is a re-spool-replay operation again, the pachinko balls may be disbursed.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the ball lending unit 120 stores the balls each time conversion is performed in S120 of FIG. 7 or whenever payout of pachinko balls is performed in S203 of FIG. 8 or FIG. While updating the number of stored balls in the table and communicating with the member management device 162, the example has been described in which the number of stored balls managed by the member management device 162 is updated by the member management device 162 has been described. Although the number of stored balls stored in the ball table is updated, it does not communicate with the management device, and in the card return process, it communicates with the member management device 162 (that is, transmits the number of balls stored in the ball table) The member management apparatus 162 may update the number of balls managed by the ball storage DB. According to this, the number of times of communication between the ball lending unit 120 and the member management device 162 can be reduced.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the gaming apparatus (ball lending unit 120) performs conversion processing, updates the number of stored balls stored in the ball storage table, and specifies that conversion has been performed. Although an example has been described in which the management apparatus updates the number of balls managed by the ball storage DB by transmitting a possible signal to the management apparatus (member management apparatus 162), the present invention is not limited to this. However, the management device may perform conversion processing and update the number of balls managed by the ball storage DB without storing the number of balls (ie, not having the ball table).

  In the stored-ball replaying process (FIG. 8) in this case, first, in S201, by communicating with the management device, it is determined whether or not the number of 1 yen balls stored in the management device is 200 or more. If YES in this S201, after performing the processing in S202, 200 balls are subtracted from the number of 1-yen storage balls stored in the management device by communicating with the management device in S203. On the other hand, if NO in S201, by communicating with the management device, it is determined whether or not there is a 4-yen storage ball number stored in the management device, and the processing in S205 and thereafter is performed.

  In addition, in the conversion process (FIG. 7) in this case, after performing the process of S101, the number of balls stored in the management apparatus (the number of four-yen balls and one stored in S102 by communicating with the management apparatus). The number of balls before conversion is displayed based on the number of yen balls). Next, the determination in S105 or S112 is performed by communicating with the management device to cause the management device to perform the determination, and the ball lending unit 120 displays S106, S109, S113, and S115 based on the determination result. Then, in S118, the ball lending unit 120 does not execute conversion, and in S120 communicates with the management apparatus to transmit the above-mentioned storage subtraction request of the first ownership value and the above-mentioned storage addition request of the second ownership value. Then, the number of stored balls stored in the management device is updated.

  Next, although the third to fifth embodiments will be described, the present invention is made in the following sense.

  In a store where a pachinko machine or slot machine, which is a type of gaming machine, is installed, the counter for displaying the number of balls possessed and the number of possessed medals of the player playing the game on the gaming machine corresponding to these gaming machines A game device such as a machine or a card unit is installed.

  As an invention relating to such a gaming machine, Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-249650) counts the number of balls held by a player playing a pachinko machine, and according to the number of balls, each pachinko machine A technology is disclosed that displays a ball box according to the number of balls held as a predetermined image on a display unit of a partition unit that divides the two. In addition, according to Document 2 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-42799), according to the number of balls obtained by a player playing a pachinko machine, the dollar box is displayed as a predetermined image in different numbers and colors on the display unit of the card unit. Technology is disclosed.

  In the gaming apparatus which performs display according to the number of game media possessed by the player as disclosed in the documents 1 and 2, the possession game is used as a condition for causing the display unit to display a predetermined image such as a ball box or a dollar box. It is general to set a threshold for the number of media and to display a predetermined image when the number of owned gaming media reaches this threshold. In addition, after the predetermined image is displayed on the display unit, the number of game media possessed by the player decreases with the game, and it is general to erase the display of the predetermined image when the number falls below the above threshold.

  In this case, since the threshold for displaying the predetermined image and the threshold for non-displaying the predetermined image are the same, if the number of owned gaming media repeatedly increases and decreases near the threshold, the display of the predetermined image / Non-display will switch frequently. For this reason, there is a problem that switching between display / non-display of the predetermined image is very troublesome for the player who checks the predetermined image displayed on the display section to confirm the number of owned game media.

  The inventions according to the third to fifth embodiments are made in view of the above problems, and the purpose thereof is to intuitively indicate the number of owned game media of a player who plays a game on a gaming machine It is an object of the present invention to propose a new method of preventing frequent switching of display / non-display of a predetermined image by increasing / decreasing the number of owned gaming media just before the threshold while enabling display.

  The “conversion” described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment is applied to the fourth embodiment, and not only conversion of the number of stored balls but also conversion of the number of held balls (number of held balls) is performed.

[3. Third embodiment]
[3-1. Configuration of gaming system]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a system configuration of a third gaming system 1A in the third embodiment. The third gaming system 1A is a kind of gaming devices and information display devices provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2 and a plurality of pachinko machines 2 being a kind of gaming machines installed on a gaming island not shown. A certain data display device 4, a stand counting unit 5 which is a type of gaming device and counting device provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2, a hall computer 6 which is a type of control device and management device, and a control device And a ball management computer 8 which is a type of management device.

  Each pachinko machine 2 is configured to be individually identifiable by a machine number, and each pachinko machine 2, data display device 4 and inter-table counting unit 5 are configured to be a hall computer 6 and a ball management computer 8 via a table terminal. It is connected to the. In FIG. 12, four pachinko machines 2 installed on the game island are illustrated for the sake of simplicity.

  Information display that displays various information such as game information related to the game with the pachinko machine 2 and store information related to the business of the store by color liquid crystal screen at a predetermined position above each pachinko machine 2 installed on the game island A data display device 4 which is a type of device is installed. The data display device 4 has two display units of a first display unit 430 and a second display unit 440 as described later, and displays different data on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440, respectively. . The data display device 4 is a terminal for disclosing information to a player or a gaming guest, and thus can be reworded as an information disclosing terminal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 is configured to have the touch panel 421, and the player can call the call icon, the menu icon and the version information icon displayed on the first display unit 430. By tapping, the store clerk can call, menu selection (wagon service, towel, meal break, etc.), and can be instructed to display version information of the pachinko machine 2. Therefore, the data display device 4 can be rephrased as a ringing lamp device.

  The inter-table counting unit 5 is provided on the left side (or the right side) of each pachinko machine and counts the number of pachinko balls paid out to the lower tray of the pachinko machine 2. At the lowermost position of the inter-table counting unit 5, a counting and dispensing unit 380, which will be described in detail later, is provided. The counting payout unit 380 counts and takes in pachinko balls, stores the counted pachinko balls, and pays back a predetermined number of stored pachinko balls to the player in response to the player's operation for refunding the pachinko balls. Have.

  The hall computer 6 comprehensively manages the game information of each pachinko machine 2 installed in the store, and also manages the data display device 4 provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2. Settings (display contents, display conditions, display modes, and the like) relating to the display of the display unit (the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440) are performed.

  The ball holding management computer 8 manages the counted number of balls counted in the inter-room counting unit 5, and manages the number of balls recorded in the ball holding card which the player can use for the second game. .

  In the present embodiment, an embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a normal pachinko machine 2 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described, but as described later in other embodiments, the gaming machine is a normal pachinko machine Not limited to 2, it may be an enclosed type pachinko machine. In addition, it is also possible to use a gaming machine as a slot machine.

[3-2. Information and Signal Flow]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of information and signals between the devices of the third gaming system 1A.

  From the pachinko machine 2, signals relating to the game such as a big hit medium signal, a definite change medium signal, a time medium short signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal are output to the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6.

  The big hit medium signal is a signal that is output during the big hit state, the positive change signal is a signal that is only output during the positive change state, and the short time middle signal is a short time period This signal is an output state only in the inside. The start signal is a pulse signal of a predetermined width which is output when all the display results of the special view variable display unit are derived and displayed, and the award ball signal has a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls). ) Is a pulse signal of a predetermined width which is output each time it is dispensed. These signals are examples of game signals output from the game machine. These signals will be described in detail later.

  From the inter-table counting unit 5, a possession ball signal representing the number of balls possessed by the player counted by the counting and dispensing unit 380 is output to the data display device 4. In the present embodiment, the inter-table counting unit 5 is configured to output the possessed ball signal to the data display device 4 at an intermittent timing. Here, the intermittent timing in the present embodiment is not the timing at any time (real time), for example, the timing at every predetermined time interval, the timing at which the counting result of the count withdrawal unit 380 reaches a predetermined number, counting When a predetermined time has elapsed since the withdrawal unit 380 has not been counted, the count is determined and the timing at which the determination is awaited is said.

  The inter-base counting unit 5 may, for example, carry the possession ball signal at a timing every predetermined time interval (for example, 10 seconds) or every timing when the counting number of the counting payout unit 380 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 25 balls). Output to the display device 4. The possession ball signal is an example of a signal that can specify the number of possessed game media of a player playing a game on a gaming machine.

  In addition to this, the inter-table counting unit 5 outputs to the data display device 4 a card ejection signal indicating that the ball-bearing card has been ejected. Further, ball-counting card information including the number of balls possessed by the player is output from the inter-table counting unit 5 to the ball-counting management computer 8.

  From the hall computer 6, display setting data, which is setting data for display of the display unit (the first display unit 420 and the second display unit 430) of the data display device 4, and for causing the display unit to perform specific display. The display instruction signal of is output to the data display device 4.

[3-3. Configuration of pachinko machine]
FIG. 14 is a front view showing an example of an appearance configuration of the pachinko machine 2 in the present embodiment.
The pachinko machine 2 is provided with a glass door frame 22 formed in a frame shape, and the lower surface of the glass door frame 22 is provided with a hitting supply tray 23. An operation unit 14 is provided at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the bat supply tray 23. A lower tray 24 for storing pachinko balls overflowing from the bat supply tray 23 is provided below the bat supply tray (upper tray) 23. A hit control handle (hereinafter referred to as a hit control knob) 25 for emitting a hit is provided.

  At the back of the glass door frame 22, a game board 26 is detachably mounted. Further, on the front of the game board 26, a game area 27 is provided. In the lower area on the right side of the game area 27, a special view variable display unit 28 is provided in which a plurality of types of identification information called "special symbols" are variably displayed.

  In addition, in the central portion of the game area 27, a plurality of types of identification information called "production symbols" are variably displayed and a presentation variable display portion 29 on which a presentation image is displayed, and a plurality of kinds of "normal symbols". A variable display device 30 in which identification information is variably displayed is provided. Further, the game board 26 is provided with a plurality of winning openings 44, a passing gate 31, a starting winning opening 34, and a variable winning ball device 36, and a hit ball not winning in the lower part of the gaming area 27 An out port 46 is formed to recover the

  When a hit ball is won in each of these winning openings (that is, an awarding condition is satisfied), a winning ball according to each winning opening is paid out by a ball cutting device (not shown), and the ball cutting device is paid out. A prize ball signal (one pulse per ten balls) corresponding to the number of prize balls (number of awarded balls) is output to the outside, whereby the number of prize balls is notified to the outside.

  In addition, the number of hitting balls that have won in each winning opening and the number of hitting balls collected at the out opening 46 is counted by an out ball counter (not shown) provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 and the counted hitting The number of inserted balls is notified to the outside by outputting the injected ball signal (one pulse per 10 balls) according to the number of embedded balls to the outside.

  A batted ball fired by a hammer (not shown) which is swung by the operation of the bat operating knob 25 passes through the bat rail into the game area 27 and then flows down the game area 27. At this time, the pachinko balls that did not reach the game area 27 because the launch momentum is too weak are circulated to the lower tray 24 through a circulation path (not shown).

In addition, when the ball hit into the game area 27 passes the passage gate 31, the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the variable display box 30 starts to change.
When the display result after the variable display operation of the variable display device 30 becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, ○), the movable piece 35 provided in the start winning opening 34 is opened for a predetermined time, and it is It will be in an advantageous state.

  Further, when the pachinko ball is won in the start winning opening 34, the special display variable display unit 28 starts variable display (variation display) of the special symbol, and effect display is started in the effect display unit 29. After that, when the special symbol in the special figure variable display unit 28 stops and the stop display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode, the left, middle, right effect symbols in the effect display unit 29 The variable display of also stops. Then, the display mode of the effect symbol is also set to a predetermined specific display mode (for example, 777), so that a specific gaming state (big hit state) occurs and a signal of a big hit is output. The occurrence of the big hit is notified to the outside.

  In addition, when the special symbol in special figure variable indicatory department 28 stops, the start signal of specified pulse width is output, that variable indication (variation indication) of the special symbol in special figure variable indicatory department 28 was executed outside Will be notified.

  As described above, when the big hit state occurs, the opening and closing plate 40 provided in the variable winning ball device 36 is opened to be in the first state advantageous to the player. This first state is ended by the lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls being won, whichever is earlier, and thereafter for the player. It is in a disadvantageous second state.

  Then, if a batted ball that has entered the large winning opening of the variable winning ball device 36 in the first state wins in a specific winning area (V pocket) and is detected by a V count switch (not shown), that time After the end of the first state, repeated continuation control is performed to control from the second state to the first state. The upper limit number of the repetition continuation control is set to, for example, 15 times.

  It should be noted that from the second state (the large winning opening is closed) from the second state (the state where the big winning opening is closed) from the second state (the state that the big winning opening is closed) the fixed number of variable winning ball devices 36 not provided with the specific winning area Repeated continuous control may be performed to control (a state in which the special winning opening is open). The first state is ended when the earlier one of the predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is reached, whichever is earlier. The number of times of execution of the repeated continuation control for controlling the variable winning prize ball device 36 from the second state to the first state is set to be different, for example, according to the type of a plurality of specific gaming states (big hit gaming states) There are cases where a jackpot with 15 repetitions of execution of the repeated continuous control is called a big hit for 15 rounds, and a jackpot with 2 repetitions of execution of the repeated continuous control is called a 2 round big hit.

  Even when a hit ball is won in the special winning opening (ie, the awarding condition is satisfied), a prize ball corresponding to the prize is paid out by the ball cutting device (not shown) and is paid out by the ball cutting device. The number of winning balls is notified to the outside by outputting the winning ball signal (one pulse per 10 balls) according to the number of winning balls (number of assigned balls) to the outside.

  A big hit occurs as described above when the display result of the special view variable display unit and the display result of the production symbol of the production variable display unit are stopped by the combination of the predetermined big hit symbols as described above, but the stop display is displayed on these big hit symbols In the previous state, the reach state may occur.

  When the special symbol variably displayed on the special view variable display portion 28 and the effect variable display portion 29 and the effect pattern are stopped and displayed in combination of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined probability variation symbol types, the above-mentioned repeated continuation control After the end of the "big hit", the probability fluctuation state in which the probability of becoming a big hit will be a higher probability state than the normal probability state again, and the big hit in these probability variation patterns is distinguished from the normal big hit The probability variation state is notified to the outside by the signal being in the probability variation state being output during the probability variation state after the termination of the probability variation.

  In addition, when the special symbol variably displayed on the special view variable display unit 28 and the effect variable display unit 29 and the effect pattern are stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols other than the predetermined probability variation symbol, the above-mentioned "continuous hit control" The special symbol and effect in the special view variable display unit 28 until the variable display reaches a predetermined number of times in the special view variable display unit 28 and the effect variable display unit 29 after the end of The variable display time (variation time) of the effect pattern in the variable display unit 29 is shorted when the time to be shortened than the normal gaming state, and during these shorted states, the signal is output during the short time The occurrence of the time-shortened state is notified to the outside.

  The pachinko machine 2 of the present embodiment is equipped with an information output board (not shown) for outputting these signals to the outside, and the information output board, the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6 are not shown. An external output signal consisting of a signal of big hit, a signal of positive change, a signal of medium time, a start signal and a prize ball signal is connected from the information output board through the signal cable and the data display device 4 and the hall are connected. It is output to the computer 6.

  The big hit / medium signal is a signal indicating that a big hit has occurred, and also a signal indicating that a big hit state is being controlled. During a period in which the jackpot state is controlled, control is performed such that the jackpot medium signal is in the ON state, and in a period when the jackpot state is not controlled, the jackpot medium signal is in the OFF state. As a result, it becomes possible to identify that a big hit has occurred and that the game is controlled to be in a big hit state in the game apparatus connected to the pachinko machine 2 such as the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6.

  The probability variation medium signal is a signal indicating that the rate of occurrence of a big hit is controlled to a probability variation state (high probability state) higher than the normal state (low probability state). Control is performed to turn on the in-probability signal during a period in which the in-probability state is controlled and to turn off the in-probability signal in a period in which the in-probability state is not controlled. As a result, it is possible to specify that the data display device 4 or the hall computer 6 or the like, or the gaming device connected to the pachinko machine 2 is controlled to be in the positive variation state. In addition, when it is controlled to the definite change state with the end of the big hit state, it becomes possible to specify that the definite change big hit occurred with these gaming devices. In addition, when not controlled to the definite change state with the end of the big hit state, it is possible to specify that a big hit normally occurred with these gaming devices. As a result, on the gaming apparatus side, it is possible to count the number of occurrences of the big hit and the breakdown of the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit.

  The time saving signal is a signal indicating that control is performed in a time saving state in which the variable display time of the variable display device is shortened. Control is performed such that the time-shortening signal is in the ON state while the time-shortening state is controlled, and the time-shortening signal is in the OFF state during the time-saving state. As a result, it is possible to specify that the time display state is controlled in the gaming apparatus connected to the pachinko machine 2 such as the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6.

  In addition, when the control is changed to the definite change state with the end of the big hit state but is not controlled to the short time state, it is possible to specify that the latent probability change occurrence of the latent probability has occurred with these gaming devices. Here, the latent probability variation is a big hit where the opening pattern of the big winning opening is a big hit common to the small hit and controlled to a positive variation state (high probability state) after the termination of the big hit state. The small hit is a control mode in which the game state does not change after the opening control of the big winning opening, although the big winning opening opens with a specific opening pattern (for example, 0.5 seconds of opening twice). Say. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to identify whether a small hit or a latent probability variation big hit has occurred only by opening the big winning opening with a specific opening pattern. On the other hand, in the gaming apparatus connected to the pachinko machine 2, it is possible to identify that the player is in a latent certainty state that is difficult to grasp, based on the fact that the player is not in the short time state despite the definite change state.

  In the pachinko machine 2 of this embodiment, control is performed by counting a predetermined number of prize balls based on the prize ball signal output based on winning from the game control board that controls the game in the pachinko machine 2 It has a prize ball control board (not shown) that performs control to count and lend out 25 pachinko balls that are payout units based on the number of balls possessed by the player counted by the inter-room counting unit 5 while performing. The pachinko balls can be borrowed at multiples of 25 balls, which is the payout unit.

  The pachinko machine illustrated in the present embodiment is a variable display means (for example, special figure variable display means) for deriving and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and effect symbols) capable of identifying each. It is provided with the display unit 28 and the effect display unit 29), and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) determined in advance is derived and displayed on the variable display means, control to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player It is an example of a gaming machine which controls the gaming state to a high probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display means becomes the specific display result is improved than the normal state or the normal state after the specific gaming state ends.

In addition, the pachinko machine illustrated in the present embodiment is a variable display device (e.g. When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the figure variable display portion 28 or the effect display portion 29) becomes the predetermined specific display result, the first state (open state) advantageous for the player and the player A game machine for changing a variable winning means (a special variable winning ball device for switching a big winning opening to an open state or a closed state) which can be changed to any state with an adverse second state (closed state) to a first state There,
First gaming state control means for controlling a first gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state in which opening for a maximum of 30 seconds is performed 15 times) performing a predetermined number of times of changing the variable winning means into a first state for a predetermined period;
A second gaming state (for example, opening a maximum of 0.5 seconds twice) changing the variable winning means to the first state at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period and a number smaller than the predetermined number of times A second game in which the game state is controlled to a high probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result is improved compared to the normal state after executing the state (big hit state with latent probability variation big hit) State control means,
After executing a third gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state in which an opening of up to 0.5 seconds is executed twice) in which the variable winning means is changed in the same manner as the second gaming state Third gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state before changing to the state;
Whether or not to control to the first gaming state, whether to control to the second gaming state, and whether to control to the third gaming state are determined prior to the derivation of the display result of the variable display Predetermining means to
It is an example of a gaming machine including presentation state control means for controlling to a specific presentation state in which the same presentation aspect is obtained after being controlled to the second gaming state and after being controlled to the third gaming state.

  In such a gaming machine, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is common and the presentation mode is also common when the latent probability big hit is generated and when the small hit is generated, so that the player gets the latent probability big hit It is difficult to know whether it occurred or a small hit occurred.

Moreover, the pachinko machine illustrated to this embodiment is:
The player plays a game by firing the game medium into the game area,
A variable winning device (movable piece 35) provided in the gaming area and capable of changing between a disadvantageous state (closed state) in which the gaming medium is difficult to win or unable to win, and an advantageous state (opened state) in which the gaming medium is easy to win. (So-called electric tulips)),
Based on the fact that the game media has passed through the normal start area (pass gate 31) provided in the game area, a plurality of types of normal identification information (normal symbols) that can identify each can be variably displayed, Normal identification information variable display control means for performing control of deriving and displaying the display result of the display on the normal identification information variable display device (variable display device 30);
A variable that performs control to change the variable winning device to an advantageous state based on the display result derived and displayed on the normal identification information variable display device becoming a predetermined display result (the lighting state of the LED indicating a hit) Winning device control means,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the end of a big hit type with a high base state (for example, a big hit type other than a latent probability change big hit type with a high base state)) It is an example of a gaming machine including high base state control means for controlling the variable winning device to a high base state in which the variable winning device has an advantageous state from a base state (normal state: low base state).

  In such a gaming machine, for example, when a latent probability variation hit occurs in the low base state, the high probability low base state is reached after the big hit gaming state ends, and when the small hit occurs the low after the small hit gaming state ends Since the probability low base state, if the player is controlled to the low base state after the end of the opening control of the big winning opening, whether latent probability variation jackpot occurred (is it controlled to the high probability low base state) or It is difficult to know whether a small hit has occurred (is it controlled to a low probability low base state).

  Note that the output paths of the symbol determination signal, the large hit medium signal, the time short signal and the medium signal are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. Any of these signals may be output from the main control board. For example, the main control board is connected with variable display means (for example, a special symbol display) for deriving and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols) capable of identifying each. When the specific display result (big hit symbol) predetermined in the variable display means is derived and displayed, the variable display means is controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player. Then, after the specific gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display means becomes the specific display result is improved than the normal state or the normal state. Then, the main control board outputs a symbol determination signal each time the variable display is performed by the variable display means, and outputs a signal during a big hit when controlled to the specific gaming state, and is controlled to the high probability state In the case where it is determined, the indeterminate variation signal is output, and in the case of being controlled to the high base state, the time reduction signal is output.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, when a latent probability variation occurrence occurs in a low probability low base condition, the signal is a positive signal during the big hit gaming condition end (after the big winning opening is opened twice at the longest 0.5 seconds) When the small hit is generated in the low probability low base state, the small hit game state is on after the small hit gaming state is over (after the big winning opening is opened twice in 0.5 seconds at maximum). The signal is OFF, and the time signal is OFF. Therefore, in an external device such as a data display device to which a signal is input, it can be determined based on the probability change signal and the time delay signal whether it is a latent probability change state (probability change signal ON, time delay signal OFF). ing.

  Note that the pachinko machine 2 in the present embodiment can be a pachinko machine of the enclosed ball type (hereinafter referred to as "encapsulated pachinko machine") 2B instead of the ordinary pachinko machine 2 described later. In the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B, the pachinko ball is enclosed inside, and the player operates the hitting operation handle to drive the firing motor of the launching device to drive the firing ball into the game area one by one to play a game. Is configured as. The pachinko balls thrown into the game area are collected in one of the winning openings or are collected in the out opening without winning. The pachinko balls that have won a prize in one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls that have been collected in the out port are reduced again to the hitting position through the collection path in the gaming machine. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is hit again in the game area.

  Although the details will be described later, in the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B, the player plays a game with points. Specifically, the point is reduced each time a launch ball is detected by the launch ball detector provided in the launcher, and the point is added each time a fall ball is detected by the fall ball detector. So, we update points as needed. In addition, when the game ball wins in the winning opening, the points are updated as needed by adding the points corresponding to the winning in the winning opening to the points.

  In the case where the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B is applied to the present embodiment, the player's points may be treated as the number of owned gaming media, and the possession ball special display described later may be performed. Specifically, the thresholds (first display threshold, first non-display threshold, second display threshold and second non-display threshold) for the player's current points are defined, and the threshold determination for the player's points is made. The display control and the non-display control similar to those of the above-described embodiment may be performed to display / non-display the predetermined image on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4.

[3-4. Configuration of counter unit]
FIG. 14 is a front view showing an example of the appearance configuration of the inter-stand counting unit 5, and FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an example of a functional configuration of the inter-stand counting unit 5.
On the front of the inter-table counting unit 5, as shown in FIG. 14, there are provided an operation button 550 including a ticket issue button 551 and a withdrawal button 552, and a card insertion slot 560 for the player to insert / extract the ball-bearing card. It is done.

  When the player presses the ticket issue button 551, a ball-bearing card recording the number of balls (number of balls held) of the player at that time is issued from the card insertion slot 560. In addition, when the player presses the payout button 552, a predetermined number of unit balls out of the number of balls possessed is paid back to the pachinko machine 2, and the player can play a game using the paid pachinko balls. Become. In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the loan rate is 4 yen, and the number of unit balls to be refunded to the player in one refund operation will be described as 125.

  The card insertion slot 560 is connected to a ball holding card reader / writer (R / W) 570 built in at a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 560 as shown in FIG. Reading and writing of recorded information of the card ID and the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) recorded on the ball-inserted card inserted from the card insertion slot 560 are performed.

  A control unit 505 for controlling the operation of the inter-stand counting unit 5 is provided at a substantially central position of the inter-stand counting unit 5 so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the inter-stand counting unit 5. The control unit 505 controls various operations of the inter-plate counting unit 5.

  In addition, pachinko balls are counted and taken into the lowermost position of inter-stand counting unit 5, and the counted pachinko balls are the maximum fraction minutes, that is, less than 25 units which is a payout unit in corresponding pachinko machine 2 While storing only 24 which is the maximum value of the fraction, the counting and dispensing unit 380 is provided which counts pachinko balls having the fraction less than the unit. Hereinafter, the "fraction less than unit" is referred to as "fraction".

  As shown in FIG. 14, a horizontally long box-like connecting box 340 disposed between the lower plate 24 of the pachinko machine 2 and the game board of the gaming island is connected to the counting and dispensing unit 380. It has become.

  The connection box 340 is formed on the end side of the connection box 340. The end box (not shown) having a relatively large thickness in the height direction and the thickness in the height direction are relatively small. And a connecting portion between them and a path box (not shown).

  The connection box 340 is connected to the counting and dispensing unit 380 so that the end box is located below the lower tray 24, and the upper surface of the end box has pachinko balls discharged from the lower tray 24. An input portion 345 in the hopper shape to be input is formed. Also, at the lower front position of the termination box, the player has an open / close shutter that can be opened and closed normally and biased to be in a closed state, and the fraction to be refunded (returned) from the counting payout unit 380 There is provided a return port 342 through which pachinko balls are discharged.

  Also, at the upper position in the path box, two streams are provided to incline toward the counting and dispensing unit 380, and guide the pachinko balls inserted into the insertion portion 345 to the counting and dispensing unit 380 under natural flow. A counting passage 343 is provided which consists of a passage. In addition, a return passage 344 is provided at a lower position of the counting passage 343 so as to be inclined toward the return port 342 and guides the pachinko ball dispensed from the count dispensing unit 380 to the return port 342 under natural flow. There is.

  In addition, a counting lever 341 which enables the player to slide is provided at the upper front position of the end box 340a, and the inserting portion 345 is made to slide the counting lever 341 against the urging. The opening / closing shutter 346 provided at the entrance to the counting passage 343 is opened.

  The connection box 340 is connected to the inside of the counting / dispensing unit 380, and is connected to the counting passage 343 so as to be inclined from the front side of the space counting unit 5 to the inward side of the space counting unit 5. A counting sensor (not shown) for detecting and counting pachinko balls flowing down the inflow path is provided at each end of the inflow path at the end position of the inflow path. Pachinko balls flowing into the counting and dispensing unit 380 through the passage 343 are detected by the counting sensor and counted. When counted by the counting sensor, a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is output from the counting and dispensing unit 380 to the control unit 505 in accordance with the detection of the pachinko ball of one ball. The control unit 505 adds one to the stored possession ball number each time the detection signal is input.

  In addition, when the number of balls possessed by the player increases, the pachinko ball discharged from the pachinko machine 2 flows into the counting passage 343 from the lower tray 24 as needed by keeping the player pulling the counting lever 341. If the pachinko balls are ejected from the pachinko machine 2 without pulling the counting lever 341, the pachinko balls are accumulated in the lower plate without pulling the counting lever 341. There are two cases where the accumulated pachinko balls flow into the counting passage 343 at a stroke by pulling the counting lever 341 at the stage when the balls are accumulated, and are counted by the counting and dispensing unit 380 at one stroke.

  In the case where the player's ball number decreases, it is a case where pachinko balls are refunded to the player by the player's refund operation, and as described above, the number of refunds by one refund operation is 125. The number of balls held decreases by 125 per one refund operation. The control unit 505 subtracts 125 from the stored possession ball number each time one refund operation is performed. However, if the refund operation is performed when the possession ball number is less than 125, the possession ball number is set to 0. That is, the number of balls corresponding to the stored number of balls is subtracted.

  Further, the inter-table counting unit 5 and the pachinko machine 2 are configured to be able to send and receive lending-related signals associated with lending of a plurality of pachinko balls predetermined as a payout unit. The lending-related signals include a lending request signal for causing the pachinko machine 2 to lend the gaming ball from the inter-room counting unit 5, a stand terminal lending completion signal output from the pachinko machine 2, a stand READY signal, inter-table counting A signal such as a unit READY signal or a terminal terminal lending request completion confirmation signal is included. In addition, from pachinko machine 2, game signal such as big hit medium signal, definite change medium signal, time medium-time signal, prize ball signal, start signal etc etc, and a strike ball counter (not shown) provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 Are configured to be able to receive the striking ball signal output from

  As shown in FIG. 15, the inter-table counting unit 5 includes a control unit 505, an operation button 550, a ball holding card insertion / ejection unit 565, a ball holding card R / W 570, a counting and dispensing unit 380, and a communication unit. And 590.

  The control unit 505 is volatile which can store card information 531 such as the number of balls stored in the ball receiving card being received, and the CPU 510 which is a type of control device, the ROM 520 which is a type of non-volatile storage device And a RTC 540 capable of outputting time information, calendar information, and the like. The RAM 530 is backed up by a battery (not shown), and retains data stored for a predetermined period even if the power is shut off.

  The ROM 520 stores an inter-area counting unit processing program 521 which is read by the CPU 510 and executed as inter-area counting unit processing (see FIG. 34). The inter-plate counting unit processing will be described in detail later using a flowchart.

  In the card information 531 stored in the RAM 530, information such as a ball-bearing card ID and the number of balls possessed by the player (the number of balls) is recorded.

  The communication unit 590 is a communication device for exchanging data with the data display device 4 and transmitting / receiving a signal, and includes, for example, a wired communication module for performing communication via a wired cable. Communication unit 590 transmits a possession ball signal indicating the possession ball of the player to data display device 4 according to the control of CPU 510.

[3-5. Functional configuration of hall computer]
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a functional configuration of the hall computer 6.
The hall computer 6 includes a CPU 610, an input device 620, a display 625, a speaker 630, a clock device 635, a first communication unit 640, a second communication unit 650, a ROM 670, a hard disk 680, and a RAM 690. It is a computer system which is configured to be provided and connected to each other via a bus.

  The CPU 610 is a control device and an arithmetic device that collectively controls each part of the hall computer 6 in accordance with various programs such as a system program stored in the ROM 670. In the present embodiment, the CPU 610 has a display content setting unit 611 and a game counting unit 612 as main functional units.

  The input device 620 is an input unit configured to have, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a signal (operation signal) of a pressed key or button to the CPU 610. By the operation input from the input device 620, an instruction operation such as editing of data of various databases stored in the hard disk 680 is performed.

  The display 625 is a display device that performs various displays based on a display control signal output from the CPU 610, and includes an LCD or the like. The display 625 displays the contents of data of various databases stored in the hard disk 680.

  The speaker 630 is a sound output device that performs various sound outputs based on a sound output control signal output from the CPU 610. For example, when a warning is issued or an abnormality occurs, a warning sound or the like is output from the speaker 630 for notifying the administrator of the same.

  The watch device 635 is an internal watch included in the hall computer 6, and is configured to have, for example, a quartz oscillator including a quartz oscillator and an oscillation circuit. The clocked time (including date) of the clock device 635 is output to the CPU 610.

  The first communication unit 640 is a communication device for performing communication with the pachinko machine 2 and includes, for example, a wired communication module for performing communication via a wired cable. The first communication unit 640 receives from the pachinko machine 2 game signals such as a big hit medium signal, a definite change medium signal, a time medium short signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal. In addition to these game signals, a safe signal indicating the number of safe balls or an out-ball signal indicating the number of out-balls may be received.

  The second communication unit 650 is a communication device for performing communication with the data display device 4 and includes, for example, a wired communication module for performing communication via a wired cable. According to the control of the CPU 610, the second communication unit 650 transmits the display setting data 691 and the simultaneous effect display instruction signal to the data display device 4.

  The ROM 670 is a read-only nonvolatile storage device, and stores various programs such as a system program of the hall computer 6. In the present embodiment, the ROM 670 stores a management program 671 read by the CPU 610 and executed as management processing (see FIGS. 27 and 28). The management program 671 includes a display content setting program 671a executed as a display content setting process (see FIG. 29) as a subroutine. These processes will be described later in detail using flowcharts.

  The hall computer 61A may be configured not to include the ROM 670 as a storage device. In this case, for example, the above-described various programs may be stored in the hard disk 680.

  The hard disk 680 is a readable and writable non-volatile storage device, and stores various data related to the display setting of the data display device 4 and various databases related to the game played on the pachinko machine 2. Specifically, a display table 681, a simultaneous effect display table 682, a display pattern table 683 and a game aggregation database 684 are stored.

  The display table 681 is a table related to the setting of the display content of the data display device 4, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. A pachinko machine ID, a model name, a display type, and a display content are stored in the display table 681 in association with each other.

The pachinko machine ID is a number (ID) for uniquely identifying each pachinko machine 2 and is individually assigned to each pachinko machine 2.
The model name is the model name of the pachinko machine 2 of the pachinko machine ID.
The display type is a type of display of the data display device 4, and two types of “normal” and “simultaneous effect” are defined in the present embodiment.
The display content is the display content to be displayed on the display unit of the data display device 4, and the display content of the first display unit 430 and the display content of the second display unit 440 are individually defined.

  Specifically, the model name of the pachinko machine 2 whose pachinko machine ID is P1 to P20 is "pachinko XXX". And, as display contents of the first display 430 at the normal time, (1) Pachinko machine model name, (2) start number, (3) big hit number, (4) probability big hit number, (5) normal big hit number, 6) The previous day's number of big hits, (7) the number of previous big days' hits, (8) Special possession ball indication, (9) Version information is defined.

  (8) The possession ball special display is a special display for displaying the possession ball of the player playing a game with the pachinko machine 2 provided correspondingly to the data display device 4 using a predetermined image. The player's possession ball can be paraphrased as a possession sphere simple display which is simply expressed using a predetermined image. In the present embodiment, a case where the possessed ball special display is performed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 will be described as an example.

  Further, (1) big hit running presentation, (2) pachinko machine special video, and (3) special character video are defined as the display contents of the first display section 430 at the time of simultaneous rendering.

  (1) When the pachinko machine 2 that has made a big hit exists in the pachinko machine 2 of the same model, the big hit running presentation is the first of the data display devices 4 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 2 of the same model. It is an effect of displaying a special image for celebrating a big hit on the display unit 430. The running effect is realized by displaying a big hit video on the data display device 4 from end to end of the game island with a fixed time difference.

  (2) The pachinko machine special video is a promotion video of the pachinko machine 2 of the model and is displayed simultaneously on the first display 430 of the data display device 4 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 2 of the same model. Let

  (3) The special character image is an image of a hidden character or mascot character of the pachinko machine 2 of the model, and the first display 430 of the data display device 4 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 2 of the same model. Show simultaneous effects on.

  In addition, (1) vacant platform information, (2) big hit information, (3) latency probability change information, and (4) time saving information are defined as display contents of the second display section 440 at the normal time.

  (1) Vacant table information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is currently a vacant board. Whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is an empty platform is, for example, an empty platform when no game signal has been received from the pachinko machine 2 for a predetermined time or more (for example, when no out signal or safe signal is received). It can be judged.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the pachinko machine 2 is provided with the inter-stand counting unit 5, information such as the card ejection signal from the inter-stand counting unit 5 and the number of balls recorded in the ball-bearing card It is also possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is an empty platform based on Alternatively, the signal from the pachinko machine 2 and the signal from the inter-base counting unit 5 may be used in combination to determine whether the pachinko machine 2 is a vacant platform. In this case, the vacant platform determination can be performed more reliably.

  Note that, unlike the present embodiment, an embodiment may be considered in which a card unit that accepts a membership card or a visitor card and processes card information is also provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is an empty platform based on information such as the card ejection signal from the card unit, the prepaid balance recorded on the card, the number of balls held, etc. It is. Alternatively, the signal from the pachinko machine 2 and the signal from the card unit may be used in combination to determine whether the pachinko machine 2 is a vacant platform. Also in this case, the vacant platform determination can be performed more reliably.

  Even if the game signal is not received from the pachinko machine 2 for a predetermined time or more, the player may have left the seat for reasons such as a rest after securing a seat. Therefore, for the pachinko machine 2 in which the player is not seated, a clerk may look around and check whether the platform is an empty platform. In the case of a vacant platform, the store clerk may set the data display device 4 to display the vacant platform using a setting remote controller.

  (2) The jackpot information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in a jackpot. While the jackpot signal from the pachinko machine 2 is being received, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 2 is in the middle of a jackpot.

  (3) The latent probability change information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is currently in the latent probability change state. During the latent certainty change, since the definite change state is hidden and the lottery is performed with a certain change probability, the player is likely to make a big hit by continuing the game as it is.

  (4) The time saving information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in the current time saving state. During the short hours, the player can rotate in the power support (support by the electric tulip) state by a predetermined number of rotations (for example, 30 rotations), but since the lottery is performed with normal probability, there is a possibility of a big hit It is not different from normal time.

  Further, (1) store advertisement information, (2) new base replacement information, and (3) store event information are defined as display contents of the second display section 440 at the time of simultaneous rendering.

  (1) Store advertisement information is information indicating the business hours of the store, the model name of the pachinko machine 2 installed, the service content, and the like.

  (2) New stand replacement information is information indicating the pachinko machine 2 introduced as a new stand, and information for notifying the date of the next new stand change.

  (3) Store event information is information on an event implemented in the store. For example, information such as Women's Day and Silver Day is included in this.

  In the display table 681, game information based on the information output from the pachinko machine 2 is defined as the display content of the second display unit 440. Specifically, (1) vacant board information, (2) big hit information, (3) latency probability change information, and (4) time saving information defined as the display contents of the second display section 440 at the normal time are pachinko machine 2 Is information that can be identified based on the game signal output from the. Therefore, the display content setting unit of the hall computer 6 can set game information based on the information output from the pachinko machine 2 as the display content of the second display unit 440. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming information visible to gaming customers other than the player. For example, when the game information is the identification of the latent probability change state, the player may be notified that the latent probability change is being made to gaming customers other than the player without being informed that the latent probability change is being made. It becomes possible.

  Further, in the display table 681, as the information to be displayed on the second display unit 440, information smaller than the information to be displayed on the first display unit 430 is defined. As a result, the display content setting unit of the hall computer 6 sets the display content so as to cause the second display unit 440 to display less information than the information to be displayed on the first display unit 430. According to this, it is possible to make the information visually recognized with an appropriate amount of information for game players other than the player. What is displayed on the second display unit 440 is information for game customers other than the player, so it may be less information than the information displayed on the first display unit 430 that the player confirms during the game. It is considered that there are many cases where it is sufficient for the gamer to look around the entire game island, since he usually does not look at the details in detail.

  In the display table 681 described above, display contents to be displayed on the display unit (the first display unit 430, the second display unit 440, and the second display unit 440) of the data display device 4 are defined. By creating display setting data 691 using 681, the display content of the display unit of the data display device 4 is set. Therefore, the hall computer 6 has display content setting means for setting the display content of the data display device 4.

  The simultaneous effect display table 682 is a table related to display settings of the data display device 4 at the time of simultaneous effect, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. A model name, a simultaneous effect type, a simultaneous effect display condition, and a simultaneous effect video data 493 are defined in the simultaneous effect display table 682 in association with each other.

The simultaneous effect type is various display contents defined in the display type “simultaneous effect” of the display table 681.
The simultaneous effect display condition is a condition for displaying the simultaneous effect on the first display unit 430.
The simultaneous effect video data 493 is data of an image to be displayed on the first display unit 430 when the simultaneous effect display condition is satisfied.

  For example, for the model name "pachinko XXX", "big hit running presentation", "pachinko machine special video", and "special character video" are determined as simultaneous rendering types. The simultaneous effect display condition of the "big hit running effect" is "a pachinko machine that has made a big hit among the pachinko machines of the same model", and in this case, the simultaneous effect video to be displayed on the first display section 430 is "Movie_XXX1" It is.

  The simultaneous effect display condition of the “pachinko machine special image” is “every time the first prescribed time elapses”, and in this case, the simultaneous effect image to be displayed on the first display unit 430 is “Movie_XXX2”. The first prescribed time can be set as appropriate, and can be, for example, 3 hours.

  The simultaneous effect display condition of the “special character image” is “every time the second prescribed time elapses”, and in this case, the simultaneous effect image to be displayed on the first display unit 430 is “Movie_XXX3”. The second prescribed time can be set as appropriate, and can be, for example, 2 hours.

  In addition, as shown in the drawing, data relating to a plurality of simultaneous effects are defined also for the model name “Pachinko YYY”.

  In addition to the display contents of the display unit of the data display device 4, display conditions are also defined in the simultaneous rendering display table 682 described above, and the CPU 610 uses the simultaneous rendering display table 682 to set display settings. By creating the data 691, the display contents and display conditions of the data display device 4 are set. Therefore, the hall computer 6 also has display condition setting means for setting the display conditions of the data display device 4 in addition to the display content setting means.

  The display pattern table 683 is a table in which display patterns of information to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 are defined. The first display unit display pattern table 683a and the second display unit The display pattern table 683b is included in this.

  FIG. 08 is an example of the table configuration of the first display portion display pattern table 683a, and the display type, the display pattern, and the display mode of the first display portion 430 are defined in association with each other. As described above, two types of "normal" and "simultaneous effect" are defined in the display type.

  “Pattern A, Pattern B, Pattern C, Pattern D,...” Is defined in the display pattern of the display type “Normal”. For example, in "pattern A", as a display mode of the first display section 430, "model name" in the first display window, "start count" in the second display window, ..., "front" in the seventh display window It is defined that "the number of hits to each day's jackpot" and "the special ball display" are displayed on the eighth display window. Similarly, for example, in "pattern C", "type name" in the first display window, "start count" in the second display window, ..., "probably big hit number in the seventh display window", the eighth display window It is stipulated that "The possession ball special display" is displayed on.

  In the display pattern of the display type "simultaneous effect", "pattern a, pattern b, pattern c, pattern d, ..." is defined. Specifically, as a display mode of the first display unit 430, "full screen big hit running image" for "pattern a", "pachinko machine advertisement video for all screen" and "pattern c" for "pattern b" It is defined that “full screen special character video” and “live video” are displayed as “pattern d”.

  FIG. 09 shows an example of the table configuration of the second display portion display pattern table 683b, and the display type, the display pattern, and the display mode of the second display portion 440 are similar to the first display portion display pattern table 683a. It is determined in association with it. As described above, two types of "normal" and "simultaneous effect" are defined in the display type.

  “Pattern P, pattern Q, pattern R, pattern S,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “normal”. Then, as the display mode of the second display unit 440, "full screen vacant base information" for "pattern P", "full screen big hit information" for "pattern Q", and "full screen latency probability variation" for "pattern R" It is defined that "full screen short time information" is displayed in "information" and "pattern S".

  "Pattern p, pattern q, pattern r, ..." is defined in the display pattern of the display type "simultaneous effect". Then, as a display mode of the second display unit 440, "full screen store advertisement information" for "pattern p", "full screen new base replacement information" for "pattern q", and "full screen store" for "pattern r" It is defined that the event information is displayed.

  In the display pattern table 683 described above, it is defined what kind of display object to display data on the display unit of the data display device 4, and the CPU 610 uses the display pattern table 683 to set display data 691. The display mode of the data display device 4 is set by creating. Therefore, the hall computer 6 has display mode setting means for setting the display mode of the data display device 4 in addition to the display content setting means and the display condition setting means.

  Display setting data 691 is set individually for each data display device 4 based on the display table 681, the simultaneous effect display table 682, and the display pattern table 683 described above. An example of the data configuration is shown in FIG.

  A pachinko machine ID, a model name, setting data, and simultaneous rendering setting data are stored in the display setting data 691 in association with each other.

In the setting data, the display type, the display content, and the display pattern are stored in association with each other.
The display content and the display pattern include the display content and the display pattern of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440, respectively. The simultaneous effect setting data stores the simultaneous effect type, the simultaneous effect display condition, and the simultaneous effect video data 493 in association with each other.

  Such display setting data 691 is individually created for each of the plurality of data display devices 4 and transmitted to the corresponding data display device 4 so that the data display devices 4 can be appropriately selected regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2 Can be displayed.

The game aggregation database 684 is a database in which data related to a game in the management pachinko machine 2 is stored, and an example of the data configuration is shown in FIG.
In the game aggregation database 684, game aggregation data is stored separately for each managed pachinko machine 2. In each game tally data, a pachinko machine ID which is identification information of the management pachinko machine 2, a model name, occurrence frequency data, and average big hit frequency data are stored in association with each other.

  For example, the date, the number of times of start, the out, the safe, and the number of big hits are stored in association with the occurrence number data. The number of big hits usually includes the number of big hits, the number of probability big hits, the number of latent probability changes, and the number of time savings. Although illustration is omitted, depending on the model of the pachinko machine 2, there is a model in which a small hit or a probability exists, so it is preferable to store the number of occurrences of these in the occurrence number data.

  The average big hit number data usually stores an average value of the occurrence number of the big hit and an average value of the occurrence number of the probability variation big hit.

  The data collected by the hall computer 6 is not limited to the above data. The hall computer 6 also counts and manages data related to the profit and loss of the store for each pachinko machine 2. For example, data such as the number of divisions (number of machine divisions and percentage of prizes), payout rate, customer retention rate, sales balls, prize balls, prize amount, gross ball profit, etc. are also collected, and these data are also stored in hard disk 680 as a database. Are stored.

  The RAM 690 is a volatile readable / writable memory, and in the present embodiment, display setting data 691 in which display contents, display conditions, and display modes for each data display device 4 are set is stored. The RAM 690 is backed up by a battery (not shown). Even when the power is shut off, the stored data is retained for a predetermined period.

[3-6. Configuration of Data Display Device]
FIGS. 23 and 24 are diagrams showing an example of the appearance configuration of the data display device 4.
The data display device 4 has a first display 430 for displaying game information based on information output from at least the pachinko machine 2 for the player playing the game in the pachinko machine 2, and a player playing the game in the pachinko machine 2 It comprises with two displays of the 2nd display part 440 which displays information for other than a game player, ie, a surrounding game player.

  In the following description, with the player playing the pachinko machine 2 as a reference, the front direction and the back direction with respect to the player are referred to as the front-back direction, the right direction and the left direction with respect to the player as the reference The upward and downward directions are defined as the upward and downward directions, respectively.

  23 (1) and 23 (2) are perspective views of the data display device 4. FIG. The housing of the data display device 4 has a base portion 4A having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a horizontal direction in front view, and a door portion configured to protrude in the front direction from the right end portion and the left end portion of the base portion 4A. And 4B. The left and right door portions 4B are designed so that the width thereof is half the width of the base portion 4A.

  FIG. 23 (3) is a front view of the data display device 4. On the front surface of the base portion 4A, a first display portion 430 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction in a front view is formed. The first display unit 430 is formed to face the player, and a player playing the pachinko machine 2 can visually recognize the first display unit 430 from the gaming position. That is, the first display portion 430 is formed in a direction in which the player can visually recognize from the gaming position where the player plays a game.

  FIG. 23 (4) is a right side view of the data display device 4. On one of the left and right sides of the door 4B, a second display 440 is formed to display information for game customers other than the player playing the pachinko machine 2. The second display portion 440 is formed on the right side of the door 4B on the right side as viewed from the player, and on the left side of the door 4B on the left side as viewed from the player. That is, the second display portion 440 is formed on the outer surface of each of the door portions 4B, and the player can not visually recognize the second display portion 440 from the gaming position. On the other hand, gaming customers other than players who do not look at the pachinko machine 2 for example, such as a gaming customer who has selected the pachinko machine 2 to start the game looking over the pachinko machine 2 of the gaming island from the end of the gaming island , And the second display unit 440 can be viewed.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (2), the left and right door portions 4B are configured to be foldable and storable toward the inside. Specifically, the left and right door portions 4B can be folded inwardly by the hinges 4C. Because the width of the left and right door parts 4B is designed to be half of the width of the base part 4A excluding the hinge 4C, when the left and right door parts 4B are closed, they just overlap with the base part 4A. At this time, the left and right door portions 4B are parallel to the base portion 4A, and the first display portion 430 is covered with the left and right door portions 4B. As described above, since it is possible to fold the left and right door parts 4B inward, when installing the data display device 4 on the game island or removing it from the game island, the left and right door parts 4B are folded. Installation and removal work can be done easily.

  Further, the second display portion 440 is formed on the outer surface which the player can not visually recognize when the door portion 4B is opened. However, when the door portion 4B is closed, the player displays the second display portion 440. It becomes visible from the front. Thus, in the data display device 4, the player can view the first display 430 but can not view the second display 440 (the player other than the player can see it). While it is possible to set it to one state (the state in which the second display unit 440 is perpendicular to the first display unit 430), the player can not visually recognize the first display unit 430, but the second display unit 440 It is also possible to set the second state in which the player can visually recognize (the state in which the second display unit 440 is parallel to the first display unit 430).

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of the second display unit 440. As shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the second display unit 440 is configured so as to be removable from the transparent plastic lid P that covers the entire second display unit 440. The display surface of the second display portion 440 projects beyond the housing surface when the door portion 4B is opened (in the case of the door portion 4B on the right side, it projects to the right side, and in the door portion 4B on the left side, it projects to the left side And an outward fitting step 441 that forms a step between the housing surface of the second display unit 440 and the display surface of the second display unit 440).

  The plastic lid P shown in FIG. 24 is a lid member having a peripheral wall 443 protruding from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom plate 442, and has a tray shape in which the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 are integrally formed of a translucent plastic material. Have. An inward fitting step portion 444 is provided which forms a step between the surface of the bottom plate 442 on which the peripheral wall 443 is provided and the end surface (the edge surface of the tray shape) of the peripheral wall 443. By fitting the fitting step 444 with the outward fitting step 441, the inner surface of the inward fitting step 444 is engaged with the outer surface of the outward fitting step 441, and the plastic lid P is engaged. And the second display unit 440 are integrated.

  Further, in the recess formed by the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 of the plastic lid P, it is possible to insert a POP advertisement 445 for notifying various information to the game customer. The POP advertisement 445 can post, for example, information on the sales of a store where the pachinko machine 2 is installed, and information on an event performed in the store.

  FIG. 24 shows, as an example of the POP advertisement 445, a POP advertisement 445 indicating that the day is Ladies' Day, which is one of the event days. When the inward fitting step portion 444 is fitted to the outward fitting step portion 441 of the door portion 4B in a state where the POP advertisement 445 is inserted into the concave portion of the plastic lid P, the POP advertisement 445 and the bottom plate 442 It is supported by being held between the second display unit 440 and the display surface of the second display unit 440, and hides the display screen of the second display unit 440.

  In addition, since the plastic lid P has translucency, the inserted POP advertisement 445 can be viewed by the game customer from the outside through the bottom plate 442. The pachinko machine 2 in which the POP advertisement 445 of Women's Day is raised on the corresponding data display device 4 is a female-only platform, and only women can play games.

  In addition, the POP advertisement is not limited to the notification of the above-mentioned event day, for example, new base information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 installed corresponding to the data display device 4 is a new base, or the pachinko machine 2 is 4 It is possible to post various information such as information indicating that it is a circular pachinko, a two-yen pachinko, and a one-yen pachinko, and information indicating the model name of the pachinko machine 2.

  As described above, by making the plastic lid P attachable to the second display section 440, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing information for game customers other than the player. In addition, by attaching the plastic lid P via the POP advertisement, the surrounding gaming customers can confirm the information on the store and the pachinko machine 2. In addition, if the second display unit 440 displays the latent probability change state by covering the second display unit 440 with the POP advertisement or the like as described above, the display is also for the player other than the player. When the user does not want to show the game player, the display itself of the second display section 440 can be made invisible.

  Here, in order to set the second display unit 440 not to display the latent probability change state, the second display unit 440 is in the latent probability change state on the side of the hall computer 6 or each data display device 4. It is necessary to carry out a setting process to prevent the display of things. On the other hand, by covering the second display unit 440 with a cover such as a POP advertisement, such a setting process is not required, and it is temporarily displayed on the second display unit 440 that it is in the latent probability change state. Even if this is the case, it is possible not to make the player and the player other than the player visually recognize this.

  Also, for example, on an event day such as Ladies Day, an operation is performed to make the second display section 440 visible by removing the POP advertisement etc. only for the player (for example, female customer) who is the target of the event. It is also good. Furthermore, when a player (for example, a female customer) who is the subject of such an event plays a game, the state is such that the door 4B is folded inward after removing the POP advertisement etc. (the second state described above) After making the second display unit 440 visible to the player, the second display unit may display a latent probability change state. According to this, only a specific player such as an event target person can visually recognize the display content of the second display unit 440.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a functional configuration of the data display device 4.
The data display device 4 includes a processing unit 410, an operation unit 420, a first display unit 430, a second display unit 440, a sound output unit 450, a clock unit 455, a short distance wireless communication unit 460, A first communication unit 470, a second communication unit 480, a third communication unit 485, and a storage unit 490 are provided.

  The processing unit 410 is a control device and an arithmetic device that controls each part of the data display device 4 in accordance with various programs such as a system program stored in the storage unit 490, and has a processor such as a CPU or DSP. Is configured. The processing unit 410 has a display setting unit 411, a first display control unit 412, a second display control unit 413, and a possession ball special display control unit 415 as main functional units.

  The operation unit 420 is an input unit having a touch panel 421 configured integrally with the first display unit 430, and outputs an operation input signal to the touch panel 421 to the processing unit 410. By tapping the touch panel 421, various instruction operations such as calling of a store clerk and selection of a menu are performed.

  The first display unit 430 is a display formed on the base unit 4A as described above, includes an LCD or the like, and performs various displays based on the display control signal output from the first display control unit 412. Is a display device that

  The second display unit 440 is a display formed on the door unit 4B as described above, includes an LCD or the like, and various displays based on the display control signal output from the second display control unit 413. Is a display device that

  The sound output unit 450 is a sound output device that performs various sound outputs based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 410. From the processing unit 410, sound and the like relating to the video to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 are output.

  The short distance wireless communication unit 460 is a communication device that performs wireless communication with a communication device such as a setting remote controller owned by a store clerk. As a scheme in which the short distance wireless communication unit 460 performs wireless communication, infrared communication can be typically applied. In addition to the infrared communication, for example, a short distance wireless communication module for realizing short distance wireless communication conforming to a communication standard such as ZigBee (registered trademark) or Bluetooth (registered trademark) is incorporated, and wireless communication is performed according to these communication methods It is also possible to do

  The clock unit 455 is an internal clock of the data display device 4 and includes, for example, a quartz oscillator including a quartz oscillator and an oscillation circuit. The clocked time (including date) of the clock unit 455 is output to the processing unit 410. The clock unit 455 corresponds to clocking means.

The first communication unit 470 is a communication device for performing communication with the pachinko machine 2, and includes, for example, a wired communication module for performing communication via a wired cable. The first communication unit 470 has a parallel communication terminal, and receives various game signals from the pachinko machine 2 in accordance with the parallel communication method.
When the pachinko machine 2 is the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, the first communication unit 470 is provided with a serial communication terminal for receiving a game signal including information related to the points from the enclosed pachinko machine 2B in a serial communication system. In this case, the game signal may be received from the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B in accordance with the serial communication system.

  The second communication unit 480 is a communication device for performing communication with the hall computer 6, and includes, for example, a wired communication module for performing communication via a wired cable. The second communication unit 480 has a parallel communication terminal, and receives display setting data and a simultaneous effect display instruction signal from the hall computer 6 in accordance with the parallel communication method.

  The third communication unit 485 is a communication device for performing communication with the inter-table counting unit 5, and includes, for example, a wired communication module for performing communication via a wired cable. The third communication unit 485 has a parallel communication terminal, and receives the possession ball signal from the inter-base counting unit 5 according to the parallel communication method.

  The storage unit 490 is a storage device configured to have a memory such as a ROM, a flash ROM, and a RAM. The storage unit 490 stores a main program 491 read by the processing unit 410 and executed as main processing. The main program 491 includes a display setting program 491a executed as a display setting process (see FIG. 29), a display control program 491b executed as a display control process (see FIGS. 30 and 31), and a possession ball special display process ( And a special ball display program executed as shown in FIG. 32) as a subroutine. These processes will be described later in detail using flowcharts.

  Further, the storage unit 490 includes display image data 492, simultaneous effect video data 493, possession ball special display threshold table 495, display pattern table 683, display setting data 691, possession ball number data 496, and the like. , And process data 497 are stored.

  The display image data 492 is data of an image to be displayed on the first display unit 430 or the second display unit 440. In the present embodiment, the display image data 492 includes data of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image when the holding ball special display is performed.

  The simultaneous effect video data 493 is video data of a simultaneous effect to be displayed on the first display unit 430 at the time of the simultaneous effect of the pachinko machine 2. The simultaneous production video data 493 includes simultaneous production such as video data for performing a big hit running production, promotion video data of the pachinko machine 2, video data of hidden characters and mascot characters of the pachinko machine 2, and live video data of the pachinko machine 2. Includes various video data pertaining to

The possessed ball special display threshold table 495 is a table in which a display threshold for the possessed ball when causing the first display unit 430 to perform the possessed ball special display is defined, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
In the possessed ball special display threshold table, four display thresholds of a first display threshold, a first non-display threshold, a second display threshold, and a second non-display threshold are defined.

The first display threshold is a threshold for the number of possessed balls for displaying the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430, and, for example, 1000 shots are defined. The first display threshold corresponds to a first value.
The first non-display threshold is a threshold for the number of possession balls for non-display of the first predetermined image displayed on the first display unit 430, and, for example, 800 shots are defined. The first non-display threshold corresponds to a second value.

  The first display threshold and the first non-display threshold are set to have a difference for a predetermined number of spheres (hereinafter, referred to as “first predetermined number”). Specifically, in the example of FIG. 26, since the first display threshold is 1000 and the first non-display threshold is 800, the first non-display threshold is set to a first predetermined number more than the first display threshold. A small value of 200 is set. The reason why the difference between the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold is given by the first predetermined number in this way is that the display non-display of the first predetermined image is caused by the increase or decrease of the number of possession balls near the threshold. The purpose is to prevent frequent switching.

  In the present embodiment, the first predetermined number, 200, is set based on the number at which the player's ball number decreases with a predetermined trigger. In the present embodiment, a case where the predetermined trigger is one refund of pachinko balls by the player's refund operation is exemplified. By the player's refund operation, 125 pachinko balls are refunded to the player at one time. That is, the number of balls possessed by the player reduced by one refund operation is 125. The first predetermined number is 200, which gives a margin of 75 for the number of refunds of 125.

The second display threshold is a threshold for the number of possessed balls for displaying the second predetermined image on the first display unit 430, and for example, 5000 shots are defined. The second display threshold corresponds to a third value.
The second non-display threshold is a threshold for the number of possessed balls for non-display of the second predetermined image displayed on the first display unit 430, and for example, 4600 shots are defined. The second non-display threshold corresponds to a fourth value.

  Even for the second display threshold and the second non-display threshold, the threshold is determined so as to have a difference for a predetermined number of spheres (hereinafter, referred to as “second predetermined number”). Specifically, in the example of FIG. 26, the second display threshold is 5000 and the second non-display threshold is 4600, so the second non-display threshold is set as a second predetermined number above the second display threshold. A small value of 400 is set. As described above, the difference in the second predetermined number between the second display threshold and the second non-display threshold also causes the display non-display of the second predetermined image to increase or decrease the number of possession balls immediately before the threshold. The purpose is to prevent frequent switching.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the threshold is set such that the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number. In the example of FIG. 26, since the first predetermined number is 200 and the second predetermined number is 400, the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number. This aims to make the condition for non-displaying the second predetermined image more severe than the condition for non-displaying the first predetermined image. The second predetermined image is a special image different from the first predetermined image displayed when the number of possessed balls reaches a large number such as 5,000 or 10,000, and gives the player a sense of superiority and the surrounding game Since the purpose is to appeal to customers, the second predetermined image is less likely to be hidden than the first predetermined image.

Note that the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number need to be numbers that do not exceed the first display threshold.
Further, in the above example, the number (200 shots) is set as the first predetermined number, which allows the number (125 shots) for the player to decrease the number of balls possessed by one refund operation. Instead of the above, it is also possible to set a number (125 shots) in which the number of balls possessed by the player decreases by one refund operation as the first predetermined number. Alternatively, the first predetermined number may be determined based on the first display threshold. In this case, it is preferable to set the number of 1⁄3 or less of the first display threshold, more preferably, the number of 1⁄5 or less of the first display threshold as the first predetermined number.

  In the present embodiment, the second predetermined number is described as having a number larger than the first predetermined number, but it is also possible to set the same number as the first predetermined number as the second predetermined number. Good. That is, in the above example, the second predetermined number may be the same as the first predetermined number 200. However, it is preferable that the second predetermined number be a number larger than the first predetermined number, and it is preferable to set a number about 1.5 to 2 times the first predetermined number as the second predetermined number. .

  Also, differently from the above, it is possible to define the number indicated by one signal of the possessed ball signal outputted from the stand interval counting unit 5 as the first predetermined number. For example, if the inter-table counting unit 5 is configured to output the possessing ball signal to the data display device 4 every time the count value of the pachinko ball reaches 100 shots, the possessing ball signal is indicated by one signal. Since the number is 100, this 100 may be set as the first predetermined number.

  The possessed ball number data 496 is data storing the possessed ball number of the player playing a game on the pachinko machine 2 corresponding to the data display device 4, and the possessed ball signal received from the inter-base counting unit 5 at intermittent timing. It is updated based on.

  The processing data 497 is processing data for the processing unit 410 to display the possession ball special display in the possession ball special display control process, and the first display counter value or the second display counter value, the first integer n, Data for processing such as the second integer m and the number of intermediate possession balls are temporarily stored.

[3-7. Processing flow]
[3-7-1. Hall computer processing]
FIGS. 27 and 28 are flowcharts showing a flow of management processing executed by the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 in accordance with the management program 671 stored in the ROM 670.

  The CPU 610 performs the processing of loop A for each data display device 4 (A1 to A11). Loop A means to execute each step in the loop A sequentially or in parallel to each data display device 4.

  In loop A, the display content setting unit 611 performs display content setting processing for the data display device 4 (A3). Specifically, the display content setting unit 611 uses the display table 681 stored in the hard disk 680, the simultaneous effect display table 682, and the display pattern table 683 to set display data of the data display device 4. 691 is created and stored in the RAM 690 (A5). Then, the display content setting unit 611 performs connection confirmation with the data display device 4 provided corresponding to the management pachinko machine 2 (A7), and when the connection confirmation is obtained, the created display setting Data 691 is transmitted to the data display device 4 (A9). Then, the process shifts to the next data display device 4.

  When the processing of loop A for all next data display devices 4 is completed (A11), the CPU 610 receives a game signal from each pachinko machine 2 (A13). Then, based on the received game signal, the game aggregation unit 612 updates the game aggregation data of the pachinko machine 2 and stores it in the game aggregation database 684 of the hard disk 680 (A15).

  Next, the CPU 610 determines whether or not the display condition of the big hit running effect is satisfied (A17), and if it is determined that it is satisfied (A17; Yes), the big hit running effect display instruction signal is sent to each data display device 4. Send (A19). At this time, in order to cause the data display device 4 to perform the big hit running effect with a predetermined time difference, the big hit running effect display instruction signal which is delayed for each data display device 4 by the delay time equivalent to the above time difference Send. Then, the CPU 610 transfers the process to A25.

  If it is determined that the display condition of the big hit running effect is not satisfied (A17; No), the CPU 610 determines whether the other simultaneous effect display condition is satisfied (A21), and it is determined that the condition is satisfied. (A21; Yes) A display instruction signal of a simultaneous effect image corresponding to the satisfied simultaneous effect display condition is transmitted to each data display device 4 (A23). Then, the CPU 610 transfers the process to A25. If it is determined that the other simultaneous effect display condition is not satisfied (A21; No), the CPU 610 shifts the processing to A29.

  After A19 or A23, the CPU 610 determines whether it is the end timing of the simultaneous effect (A25), and if it is determined that the end timing is (A25; Yes), the simultaneous effect display end instruction signal It transmits to the display apparatus 4 (A27). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of simultaneous rendering (A25; Yes), the CPU 610 shifts the processing to A29.

  Thereafter, the CPU 610 determines whether to end the process (A29). For example, when the power of the hall computer 6 is turned off at the end of business of the store, it is determined that the processing is ended. If it is determined that the process is to be continued (A29; No), the CPU 610 returns the process to A13. If it is determined that the process is to be ended (A29; Yes), the management process is ended.

[3-7-2. Processing of data display device]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a flow of display setting processing executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 in accordance with the display setting program 491a stored in the storage unit 490.

  First, the display setting unit 411 establishes communication with the hall computer 6 (B1). Then, the display setting unit 411 requests the hall computer 6 to transmit the display setting data 691 of the data display device 4 (B3).

  Next, the display setting unit 411 receives the display setting data 691 from the hall computer 6 via the second communication unit 480, and stores the display setting data 691 in the storage unit 490 (B5). Then, based on the received display setting data 691, the initial display setting of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 is performed (B7). After the initial display setting is performed, the first display control unit 412 and the second display control unit 413 start the execution of the display control process according to the display control program 491b stored in the storage unit 490 (B9). Then, the display setting unit 411 ends the display setting process.

30 and 31 are flowcharts showing the flow of display control processing.
First, the processing unit 410 performs an empty platform determination process (C1). Specifically, as described above, based on the game signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 2 and the card discharge signal transmitted from the inter-base counting unit 5, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 2 is currently vacant. judge. As a result, if it is determined that the table is a vacant platform (C3; Yes), the second display control unit 413 controls to display the vacant platform information on the second display unit 440 (C5). On the other hand, if it is determined that the table is not a vacant platform (C3; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to C11.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the game is started by the pachinko machine 2 (C7), and if it is determined that the game is started (C7; Yes), the vacant table displayed on the second display unit 440 Control is made to hide the information (C9). If it is determined that the game has not been started (C7; No), the processing unit 410 transfers the processing to C11.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is playing a game (C11), and if it is determined that a game is playing (C11; Yes), the first based on the received gaming signal Control to update the display of the display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 is performed (C15). Specifically, based on the game signal received from the pachinko machine 2, the display information such as the number of big hits displayed on the first display unit 430 and the number of starts is updated and displayed on the second display unit 440. Update the display of big hit information, latent probability change information, and time saving information. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 2 is not playing (C11; No), the processing unit 410 transfers the process to C15.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the possession ball signal has been received from the stand-by counting unit 5 (C15), and if it is determined that it has been received (C15; Yes), based on the received possession ball signal The possession ball number data 495 of the storage unit 490 is updated (C17). Then, the processing unit 410 performs a possessed ball special display control process according to the possessed ball special display control program 491c stored in the storage unit 490 (C19). If it is determined that the possession ball signal has not been received from the inter-table counting unit 5 (C15; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to C21.

  Thereafter, the first display control unit 412 determines whether or not the simultaneous effect display instruction signal has been received from the hall computer 6 (C21), and if it is determined that it has been received (C21; Yes), execution of the big hit running effect It is determined whether an instruction has been issued (C23).

  If it is determined that the execution instruction of the big hit running effect has been issued (C23; Yes), the first display control unit 412 controls the first display unit 430 to display the big hit running image based on the display setting data 691. Perform (C25). As described above, the display instruction signal for running effect output from the hall computer 6 is delayed by a delay time equivalent to a predetermined time difference. As a result, each data display device 4 causes the first display unit 430 to display the big hit running image with the above time difference, whereby a big hit running effect is realized.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution instruction of the big hit running effect has not been issued (C23; No), the first display control unit 412 selects the simultaneous effect image corresponding to the simultaneous effect display condition included in the simultaneous effect display instruction signal Control to be displayed on the display unit 430 is performed (C27).

  Next, the first display control unit 412 determines whether or not to end the simultaneous effect display (C29), and if it is determined not to end (C29; No), it stands by as it is. If it is determined that the process is ended (C29; Yes), control is performed to end the simultaneous effect display on the first display unit 430 (C31).

  If it is determined in C21 that the simultaneous effect display instruction signal has not been received from the hall computer 6 (C21; No), the first display control unit 412 determines whether it is the display timing of the version information (C33) . The display timing of the version information may be timing each time a predetermined time elapses, or may be timing when it is detected that the version information display icon displayed on the first display section 430 is tapped by the player or the gaming guest. Good. Further, the display of the version information may be included in the simultaneous rendering display, and the simultaneous rendering display of the version information may be performed in synchronization with the simultaneous rendering of the pachinko machine 2.

  If it is determined that it is the display timing of the version information (C33; Yes), the first display control unit 412 sets the version information of the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4 to the first display unit 430. Control to be displayed on the screen (C35). Here, the version information to be displayed on the first display section 430 includes information such as the model name of the pachinko machine 2 and the number of the model, the normal big hit probability, the positive probability big hit probability, the positive probability change rate, the continuity rate etc. Be

  Next, the first display control unit 412 determines whether it is the display end timing of the version information (C37), and if it is determined that it is not the display end timing (C37; No), it waits as it is. If it is determined that it is the display end timing (C37; Yes), control is performed to end the display of the version information of the first display unit 430 (C39).

  After C31 or C39, the processing unit 410 determines whether to end the process (C41). For example, when the operation of powering off the data display device 4 is performed, it is determined that the processing is to be ended. If it is determined that the process is to be continued (C41; No), the processing unit 410 returns the process to C1. If it is determined that the process is to be ended (C41; Yes), the display control process is ended.

  FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a flow of possessed ball special display control processing. In this process, the number of display of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image is determined according to the two display counter values of the first display counter value and the second display counter value, and the first predetermined number is determined based on the display number. Control is made to display the image and the second predetermined image on the first display unit 430. In this process, "first" is attached to the head of the coefficients (parameter values) used for display control and non-display control of the first predetermined image, and coefficients (parameter values used for display control and non-display control of the second predetermined image ) Will be explained with "second" attached to the head. The first display counter value is a counter value indicating the display number of the first predetermined image, and the second display counter value is a counter value indicating the display number of the second predetermined image. These are one type of processing data 497 It is. The first display counter value and the second display counter value will be described as being initially set to zero.

  First, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 calculates the integer part of the second integer m = [number of possessed balls / second display threshold] (D1). The second integer m is a coefficient used to set the second display counter value, and is a type of processing data 497.

  Next, the possession ball special display control unit 415 calculates the number of intermediate possession balls = the number of possession balls- (m × second display threshold) (D3). The intermediate possession ball number is a coefficient used to set the first display counter value and the second display counter value, and is a kind of processing data 497.

  Next, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls has reached the second non-display threshold (D5). This condition is satisfied when the number of intermediate possession balls is the same as the second non-display threshold or exceeds the second non-display threshold.

  If it is determined in D5 that the condition is satisfied (D5; Yes), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether the second display counter value is larger than m (D7). If it is determined that this condition is satisfied (D7; Yes), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 sets m + 1 to the second display counter value (D9). This means maintaining the latest second display counter value. Then, the possession ball special display control unit 415 sets the first display counter value to 0 (D11), and then shifts the processing to D25.

  When it is determined that the condition is not satisfied in D5 (D5; No), or when it is determined that the condition is not satisfied in D7 (D7; No), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 sets m as the second display counter value. Is set (D13). Then, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 calculates the integer part of the first integer n = [the number of intermediate possessed balls / first display threshold value] (D15). The first integer n is a coefficient used to set the first display counter value, and is a type of processing data 497.

  Next, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls-(n x first display threshold) has reached the first non-display threshold (D17). This condition is satisfied when the intermediate possession ball number-(n x first display threshold) is the same as the first non-display threshold or exceeds the first non-display threshold. Then, when it is determined that this condition is satisfied (D17; Yes), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether the first display counter value is larger than n (D21).

  If it is determined in D21 that the condition is satisfied (D21; Yes), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 sets n + 1 to the first display counter value (D23). This means maintaining the latest first display counter value. Then, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 shifts the processing to D25.

  When it is determined that the condition of D17 is not satisfied (D17; No), or when it is determined that the condition of D21 is not satisfied (D21; No), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 sets n as the first display counter value. Set (D19).

  Next, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 performs control to display the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430 according to the first display counter value (D25). Specifically, the first display unit 430 displays the same number of first predetermined images as the first display counter value.

  In addition, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 controls the first display unit 430 to display the second predetermined image according to the second display counter value (D27). Specifically, the first display unit 430 displays the same number of second predetermined images as the second display counter value. Then, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 ends the possessed ball special display control process.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory view of the principle of the possessed ball special display in the above possessed ball special display control processing. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 shots, the first non-display threshold is 800 shots, and a dollar box is displayed on the first display unit 430 as a first predetermined image will be described as an example.

  In the possessing ball special display control process of FIG. 32, the first display threshold value, 1000, is regarded as one display unit number, and every time the possessed ball number reaches this display unit number (1000, 2000, 3000,.・ ・), Increase the display of the dollar box by one. In addition, the first non-display threshold of 800 is taken as one non-display unit number, and every time the predetermined number of balls falls below this non-display unit number (800, 1800, 2800, ...), the dollar box Reduce the display of one.

  In FIG. 33, the leftmost figure shows the case where the number of possessed balls = 1800, and since the number of possessed balls exceeds 1000 which is the number of display units, one dollar box is displayed. There is. After that, the number of possessed balls increases and becomes 1,900, but the number of possessed balls does not exceed 2000, which is the number of display units, so the display of the dollar box remains unchanged. After that, when the number of possession balls reaches 2000, one dollar box is increased and two are displayed.

  After that, the number of possession balls increased to 2100, but the number of possession balls does not exceed 3000, which is the number of display units, so the display of the dollar box remains unchanged at two. Thereafter, it is assumed that the player has reduced the number of balls possessed by repaying the pachinko ball, and the number of balls possessed has decreased to 1900. In this case, although the number of possession balls is below the number 2000 of display units, but not below the number of non-display units of 1800, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged at two.

  It should be noted that the number of dollar boxes to be displayed is different when the number of possession balls increases from 1,800 to 1,900 and when the possession number decreases from 2,100 to 1,900 It is a point. This means that even if the number of holding balls is the same, the number of dollar boxes to be displayed may differ depending on whether the number of holding balls changes in the increasing direction or in the decreasing direction. The details will be described later by giving a specific example.

  After that, the number of possession balls decreased and became 1,800 possession balls, but the number of possession balls is not less than 1,800, which is the number of non-displayed units, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged at two. Then, when the number of possession balls decreases and falls below the non-display unit number of 1,800, the dollar box is reduced by one and displayed.

  Next, the details of the possessed ball special display control process of FIG. 32 will be described by taking a plurality of specific examples in the case where the possessed number of balls is different. In the following description, processing in each step will be described with reference to each step of the possessed ball special display control processing of FIG.

(1) Specific example 1
First, consider the case where the number of possessed balls = 1900.
At D1, the integral part of the second integer m = [the number of possessed balls / the second display threshold value] = the integral part of [1900/5000] = 0 is calculated.
At D3, the number of intermediate possession balls = the number of possession balls- (m × second display threshold) = 1900− (0 × 5000) = 1900 is calculated.
At D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possession balls = 1900 has reached the second non-display threshold of 4600, and the determination result is negative, so the process is transferred to D13.

At D13, m is 0, so 0 is set to the second display counter value.
At D15, the integer part of the first integer n = [the number of intermediate possession balls / the first display threshold value] = integer part of [1900/1000] = 1 is calculated.

  In D17, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possession balls-(n x first display threshold) = 1900-(1 x 1000) = 900 has reached 800, which is the first non-display threshold. Is a positive determination, the process is transferred to D21.

  At D21, it is determined whether the first display counter value is larger than n. Here, since the first display counter value is different between the case where the possessed ball number increases to 1900 and the case where the possessed ball number decreases to 1900 after reaching 2000, the determination result of D21 is different. come.

  When the possessed ball number increases to 1900, since the first display counter value becomes 1 when the possessed ball number reaches 1000, it becomes the same value as n = 1. Therefore, the determination result of D21 is a negative determination, and the process is transferred to D19. At D19, n (= 1) is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 1 and the second display counter value = 0 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 1, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 0. .

  On the other hand, if the number of possession balls reaches 2000 and then decreases to 1900, the first display counter value becomes 2 when the number of possession balls reaches 2000, so it is larger than n = 1 Become. Therefore, the determination result of D21 is a positive determination, and the process is transferred to D23. At D23, n + 1 (= 1 + 1 = 2) is set to the first display counter value. That is, the first display counter value is maintained. As a result, since the first display counter value = 2 and the second display counter value = 0 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 2, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 0. .

  From the above example, even if the number of possession balls is 1900, it is displayed when the number of possession balls increases to 1900 and when the number of possession balls reaches 2000 and then decreases to 1900. It can be seen that the number of first predetermined images is different.

(2) Specific example 2
Next, consider the case where the number of owned balls = 7,900.
At D1, the integral part of the second integer m = [the number of possessed balls / the second display threshold value] = the integral part of [7900/5000] = 1 is calculated.
At D3, the number of intermediate possession balls = the number of possession balls- (m × second display threshold) = 7900− (1 × 5000) = 2900 is calculated.
At D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 2900 has reached the second non-display threshold of 4600, and the determination result is negative, so the process is transferred to D13.

As D13 is m = 1, 1 is set to the second display counter value.
At D15, the integral part of the first integer n = [the number of intermediate possession balls / the first display threshold value] = the integral part of [2900/1000] = 2 is calculated.

  In D17, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possession balls-(n x first display threshold) = 2900-(2 x 1000) = 900 has reached 800 which is the first non-display threshold, and this determination result Is a positive determination, the process is transferred to D21.

  At D21, it is determined whether the first display counter value is larger than n. Here, since the first display counter value is different between the case where the possessed ball number increases to 7900 and the case where the possessed ball number decreases to 7900 after reaching 8000, the judgment result of D21 is different. come.

  When the possessed ball number increases to 7,900, since the first display counter value becomes 2 when the possessed ball number reaches 7,000, the value becomes the same as n = 2. Therefore, the determination result of D21 is a negative determination, and the process is transferred to D19. At D19, n (= 2) is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 2 and the second display counter value = 1 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 2, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 1. .

  On the other hand, if the number of possession balls reaches 8000 and then decreases to 7900, the first display counter value becomes 3 when the number of possession balls reaches 8000, so it becomes larger than n = 2 . Therefore, the determination result of D21 is a positive determination, and the process is transferred to D23. At D23, n + 1 (= 2 + 1 = 3) is set to the first display counter value. That is, the first display counter value is maintained. As a result, since the first display counter value = 3 and the second display counter value = 1 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 3, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 1. .

(3) Specific example 3
Next, consider the case where the number of possession balls = 9900.
At D1, the integral part of the second integer m = [the number of possessed balls / the second display threshold value] = the integral part of [9900/5000] = 1 is calculated.
At D3, the number of intermediate possession balls = number of possession balls- (m × second display threshold) = 9900 shots− (1 × 5000) = 4900 shots are calculated.
At D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 4900 has reached the second non-display threshold of 4600, and the determination result is a positive determination, so the process is transferred to D7.

  At D7, it is determined whether the second display counter value is larger than m. Here, since the second display counter value is different between the case where the possessed ball number increases to 9900 and the case where the possessed ball number decreases to 9900 after reaching 10000, the determination result of D7 is different. come.

  When the possessed ball number increases to 9900, since the second display counter value becomes 1 when the possessed ball number reaches 5000, it becomes the same value as m = 1. Therefore, the determination result of D7 is a negative determination, and the process is transferred to D13. At D13, m (= 1) is set to the second display counter value.

  On the other hand, if the number of possessed balls decreases to 9900 after reaching 10000, since the second display counter value becomes 2 when the number of possessed balls reaches 10000, it becomes larger than m = 1 . Therefore, the determination result of D7 is an affirmative determination, and the process is transferred to D9. At D9, m + 1 (= 1 + 1 = 2) is set to the second display counter value. That is, the second display counter value is maintained. Then, at D11, 0 is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 0 and the second display counter value = 2 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 0, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 2 .

  As described above, when the number of balls held by the player increases, the player pulls the counting lever 341 and keeps the pachinko ball discharged from the pachinko machine 2 from the lower tray 24 to the counting passage 343 as needed. If the pachinko ball is discharged from the pachinko machine 2 without pulling the counting lever 341, the pachinko ball is stored in the lower plate 24 without being pulled by the player, and the pachinko ball is to some extent or more. There are two cases where the accumulated pachinko balls flow into the counting passage 343 at a stroke and are counted at once by pulling the counting lever 341 at the accumulated stage, and there are two cases in which there is a rapid increase.

  In particular, the latter case (when the number of possessed balls increases rapidly) is a problem. As described above, since the data display device 4 receives the possession ball signal from the inter-base counting unit 5 at intermittent timing, the number of possession balls specified from the possession ball signal received at one timing and the next timing There may be a large difference in the number of possessed balls specified from the possessed ball signal received at step. Specifically, a large number of pachinko balls are counted at once by storing pachinko balls which are won during a big hit by the player until the lower plate 24 is full, and the number of owned balls is, for example, 1000. It may increase at once in the numerical range such as 〜 to 2000 2000. In this case, since the first display threshold is 1000, in some cases, the number of possession balls may be increased across two or three first display thresholds at one time.

  Assuming such a case, in the possessed ball special display control process of FIG. 32, two integers of the first integer n and the second integer m are calculated, and using these integers, the first display counter value and the second display counter value are calculated. It is decided to set the display counter value. This makes it possible to always display the correct number of predetermined images regardless of the degree of increase (the degree of increase) of the possession number of balls.

  The display counter value (the first display counter and the second display counter value) is a coefficient for specifying the display step of the predetermined image (the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image), and the display step is increased by one step. It is a counter value which is incremented by one each time. Instead of storing such a display counter value, a display flag having a certain number of balls as a reference game medium number may be set, and a predetermined image may be displayed based on the display flag. Specifically, a value obtained by adding the first non-display threshold to an integral multiple of the first display threshold can be set as the reference game media count, and the display flag for the reference game media count can be set. For example, if the first display threshold value is 1000 and the first non-display threshold value is 800, then 800, 1800, 2800,. Set the flag. Specifically, the display flag is set to “1” each time the number of owned balls increases and reaches an integral multiple of the first display threshold. In addition, the display flag is set to “0” each time the possessed number of balls increases and reaches the reference number of game media or the number of possessed balls decreases and falls below the reference number of game media. And based on this display flag and the number of possession balls, the number of display of a predetermined picture is determined.

  A case where the reference game medium number is set to 1800 will be described. As described above, for example, when the number of possession balls increases to 1900, the display number of the first predetermined image is set to 1, and after the number of possession balls reaches 2000, it decreases to 1900. The number of displayed first predetermined images in this case needs to be two. Therefore, the display flag is set to "0" when the number of possession balls increases to reach 1,800 shots, and the display flag is set to "1" when the number of possession balls increases to reach 2,000 shots. In this case, even if the possessed ball number decreases from 2000, the display flag remains set to "1" unless it falls below the standard number of game media of 1800. That is, when the number of possessed balls increases to 1900, the display flag is set to "0", whereas the number of possessed balls decreases after reaching 2000 and reaches 1900. Means that "1" is set in the display flag. Therefore, based on the fact that the thousandth digit of the possessed ball number is 1, the display number of the first predetermined image is determined to be 1 in the former case, and the display number of the first predetermined image is determined to be 2 in the latter case. can do.

[3-7-3. Processing of counter unit]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the flow of inter-stand counting unit processing executed by the CPU 510 of the inter-stand counting unit 5 in accordance with the inter-stand counting unit processing program 521 stored in the ROM 520.

  First, the CPU 510 determines whether or not the player has inserted a card (E1), and if it is determined that the card has been inserted (E1; Yes), a card having a ball from the ball R / W 570 is used. Get information (E3). Then, the number of owned balls included in the acquired card information is stored in the RAM 530 (E5). If it is determined that the ball-bearing card has not been inserted (E1; No), the CPU 510 shifts the processing to E7.

  Next, the CPU 510 determines whether or not the ticket issuing button 551 has been pressed by the player (E7), and if it is determined that the ticket pressing button 551 has been pressed (E7; Yes), performs a ball-bearing card issuing process for issuing a ball-bearing card (E9). Specifically, control is performed such that the card information 531 corresponding to the number of possessed balls stored in the RAM 530 is written to the ball-bearing card for the ball-bearing card R / W 570, and the ball-bearing card is used as the ball-bearing card Control is made to discharge the insertion / discharge unit 565. If it is determined that the ticket issuance button 551 has not been pressed (E7; No), the CPU 510 shifts the processing to E11.

  Next, the CPU 510 determines whether or not the payout button 552 has been pressed by the player (E11), and when it is determined that the payout button 552 has been pressed (E11; Yes), performs ball payout processing (E13). Specifically, the player is controlled to make the counting payout unit 380 pay back a predetermined number (125 shots) of pachinko balls. Then, the CPU 510 updates the number of possession balls of the RAM 530 (E15). If it is determined that the payout button 552 has not been pressed (E11; No), the CPU 510 shifts the processing to E17.

  Next, the CPU 510 determines whether or not the counting result has been input from the counting and dispensing unit 5 (E17). If it is determined that the counting result has been input (E17; Yes), the possession number of balls in the RAM 530 is updated (E19). If it is determined that the counting result has not been input (E17; No), the CPU 510 shifts the processing to E21.

  Thereafter, the CPU 510 determines whether it is the output timing of the possessed ball signal (E21). Then, if it is determined that it is the output timing (E21; Yes), control is made to output the possessing ball signal to the data display device 4 (E23). If it is determined that it is not the output timing of the possessed ball signal (E21; No), the CPU 510 shifts the processing to E25.

  Thereafter, the CPU 510 determines whether to end the process (E25). If it is determined that the process is to be continued (E25; No), the CPU 510 returns the process to E1. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is to be ended (E25; Yes), the CPU 510 ends the stand-by counting unit process.

[3-8. Display screen]
FIG. 35 (1) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the first display unit 430. As shown in FIG. At the top of the first display 430, the model name of the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4 is displayed. Below, the number of big hits, the number of starts, the number of positive big hits, the number of normal big hits, the number of big hits before the previous day, the number of big hits before the previous day, and the special ball display It is displayed inside.

  At the bottom of the first display unit 430, a call icon, a menu icon, and a version information icon are displayed. The player can call a clerk by tapping the call icon with a finger. Also, the player can make a menu selection by tapping the menu icon with a finger. When the menu icon is tapped with a finger, the display is switched to a menu selection screen (not shown), and it is possible to select the display of past data and provision of various services (wagon service, towel, meal break, etc.). In addition, the player can display version information of the pachinko machine 2 on the first display unit 430 by tapping the version information icon.

  FIG. 35 (2) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the second display unit 440. As shown in FIG. In the second display section 440, vacant platform information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is a vacant platform is displayed. Specifically, a message "I can play now" is displayed in the center of the screen, along with a message "vacuum stand". By this message, the player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is currently vacant and can be played.

  FIG. 35 (3) is a view showing another example of the display screen of the second display unit 440. On the second display unit 440, big hit information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in a big hit is displayed. Specifically, a flame is displayed in the center of the screen, and a message of "big hit" is displayed in it indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is hit. By this message, the game player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is currently making a big hit.

  FIG. 36A is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the second display unit 440. As shown in FIG. On the second display portion 440, latent probability change information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in the latent state is displayed at the center of the screen. Specifically, a jagged balloon is displayed at the center of the screen, and a message of "under latent probability change" is displayed therein. Also, at the bottom of the screen, the message "Now is your chance!" Is displayed.

  Since the second display unit 440 can not be viewed from the player's game position, the player can not know that the latent change is in progress. On the other hand, the game player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is in the latent certainty change by looking at the second display section 440. In other words, the player who is viewing knows that the platform is in the chance state, but the player continues playing without knowing that it is in the chance state. In addition, if the player stops playing and leaves the game without knowing that the latent change is latent, the surrounding players know that the platform is in a chance state, so they sit on the platform and play the game. You can expect a big hit by doing. This can create a new interest that can not be realized with conventional ringing lamp devices.

  FIG. 36 (2) is a view showing another example of the display screen of the second display unit 440. As shown in FIG. In the second display section 440, time saving information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in the time saving mode is displayed at the center of the screen. Specifically, a cloud-like balloon is displayed at the center of the screen, and a message of "time saving" is displayed therein. In the lower part of the screen, the message "Sorry, Next Expectation" is displayed.

  Since the second display section 440 can not be viewed from the player's gaming position, the player can not know that the time is short. On the other hand, by looking at the second display section 440, the gaming player who is viewing can know that the pachinko machine 2 is in a short time and the possibility of a big hit is low.

  FIG. 37 is a view showing an example of a display screen of the possession sphere special display displayed on the first display section 430. As shown in FIG. FIG. 37 shows how the display of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image changes in accordance with the number of balls possessed by the player. Here, a case where a dollar box is displayed as a first predetermined image and a special box is displayed as a second predetermined image is illustrated. In addition, it is assumed that the first display threshold is 1000 and the second display threshold is 5000.

  When the number of possession balls reaches 1000, one dollar box is displayed (dollar box first display phase). When the number of held balls reaches 2000, two dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box second display phase). Similarly, when the number of possession balls reaches 3000, three dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box 3rd display stage), and when the number of possession balls reaches 4000, four dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box 4) Display stage).

When the number of balls possessed reaches 5000, the number of display of the dollar box will be 5, but since the display condition of the special box is satisfied, the display of all the dollar boxes is made non-display, and one special box is displayed It is done (special box first display phase). When the number of possessed balls reaches 6000, the number of possessed balls increases 1000 on the basis of 5000 shots, so one dollar box is displayed and one special box is displayed (dollar box first display stage & special box First display stage).
Likewise, when the number of possessed balls reaches 9000, four dollar boxes and one special box are displayed (dollar box fourth display stage & special box first display stage).

When the number of possessed balls reaches 10000, the number of display of the dollar box will be 5, but since the display condition of the special box is satisfied, the display of all the dollar boxes is hidden and one additional special box is added Two special boxes are displayed (special box second display stage). Then, when the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, the number of possessed balls increases by 1000 based on 10000, so one dollar box is displayed and two special boxes are displayed (dollar box first display stage & special Box second display stage).
The same applies to the following. For example, when the number of possessed balls reaches 15000, three special boxes are displayed (special box third display stage).

  In this display screen example, the display of the dollar box (the first predetermined image) is increased by one every 1000 balls possessed, but when the increment of the possessed ball number reaches 5000, the dollar box (first prescribed image) The special box (second predetermined image) is newly displayed with the display of the image being hidden.

  In addition, when the increment of the possessed ball number reaches 5000 shots, the display of the dollar box (first predetermined image) is continued without hiding the displayed dollar box (first predetermined image). A box (second predetermined image) may be displayed anew. That is, when the second predetermined image is displayed, the first predetermined image may not be displayed, or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

  FIG. 38 is a view showing another example of the display screen of the possession sphere special display displayed on the first display section 430. As shown in FIG. Here, the case is shown where the ball bulk of pachinko balls stacked in a two-sided box as a first predetermined image is displayed, and a two-sided box is displayed as a second predetermined image. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 and the second display threshold is 10000 is exemplified.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one row of pachinko balls is displayed on the one thousand box (one thousand box first ball bulk display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, 2 stages of pachinko balls are displayed on a 1000-square box (1000-box second ball bulk display stage). Similarly, three steps of pachinko balls are displayed in a thousand box when the possessed ball number reaches 3000 shots (the thousand box ball bulk third ball bulk display stage), and when the possessed ball number reaches 4000 shots, four pachinko balls are displayed in the thousand box. It will be (the first and second box stage display stage).

  Likewise, when the possessed ball number reaches 9,000, 9 rounds of pachinko balls are displayed on a 1,000-square box (1,000 square box ninth-bulk display stage). And, when the possession ball number reaches 10000 shots, the ball bulk of the 1000 box becomes 10 steps, but because it is not possible to stack the pachinko balls further in the 1000 box, clear all the ball volumes of the 1000 box and newly add ten thousand. One box is displayed (the first display stage of both boxes).

  After that, when the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, one row of pachinko balls is displayed in one thousand boxes, and one full box is displayed (one hundred thousand ball first display stage & ten thousand box first display stage). Likewise, when the number of possessed balls reaches 19000, 9 rounds of pachinko balls are displayed on the one thousand two box, and one ten round box is displayed (one thousand two ninth box bulk display stage & ten thousand box first display stage ). And when the possession ball number reaches 20000, the ball bulk of the 1000 box becomes 10 steps, but because it is not possible to stack the pachinko balls further in the 1000 box, clear all the ball volumes of the 1000 box and newly add 10,000 Add one box, and two boxes will be displayed (10 boxes at the second display stage).

  In this display screen example, the display of the ball bulk (the first predetermined image) of one thousand boxes is increased by one step for every 1000 balls possessed, but when the increment of the number of balls possess reaches 10000 balls, the ball bulk of one thousand boxes The (first predetermined image) is not displayed, and a universal box (second predetermined image) is newly displayed.

  In addition, when the increment of the possessed ball number reaches 10000 shots, the display of the ball size (first predetermined image) of the one-man box is continued without hiding the displayed ball size (first predetermined image) of the two-man box It may be made to newly display a two-wheeled box (second predetermined image). That is, when the second predetermined image is displayed, the first predetermined image may not be displayed, or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

  FIG. 39 is a view showing another example of the display screen of the possession sphere special display displayed on the first display portion 430. As shown in FIG. Here, a case is shown where the ball bulk of pachinko balls stacked in one ball box as a first predetermined image and the ball bulk of pachinko balls stacked in another ball box as a second predetermined image are displayed. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 and the second display threshold is 10000 is exemplified.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one row of pachinko balls is displayed in the first box (first ball bulk display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, 2 stages of pachinko balls are displayed in the first box (the second ball bulk display stage). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 3000, 3 steps of pachinko balls are displayed in the first box (the third ball bulk display stage), and when the number of possessed balls reaches 4000, the 1st box is pachinko Four stages of balls are displayed (the fourth ball bulk display stage).

  Similarly, when the possessed ball number reaches 9000, 9 stages of pachinko balls are displayed in the first box (9th ball bulk display stage). Then, when the number of possessed balls reaches 10000, 10 stages of pachinko balls are displayed in the first box. At this time, since the pachinko balls are not stacked further in the first box, the second box is displayed (tenth ball bulk display step).

  The same applies to the following, and when the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, one row of pachinko balls is displayed in the second box (the eleventh ball bulk display step). Then, when the number of possession balls reaches 20000, 10 stages of pachinko balls are displayed in the box of two eyes. At this time, since the pachinko balls are not stacked any more in the second box, the third box is displayed (twentyth ball bulk display step).

  In this display screen example, the display of the ball bulk (first predetermined image) of the ball box is increased by one step every 1000 shots, and the increment of the possessed ball reaches 10000 in advance. The display of the ball bulk (first predetermined image) of the stacked ball boxes is left as it is (continuously), and the ball bulk of the next ball box (second predetermined image) is newly displayed.

  In addition, when the increment of the possessed ball number reaches 10000 shots, the display of the ball box (first predetermined image) of the ball box stacked first is not continued, and the ball box of the ball box stacked first (( The first predetermined image) may not be displayed, and the next ball box (second predetermined image) may be newly displayed. That is, when the second predetermined image is displayed, the first predetermined image may not be displayed, or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

[3-9. Action effect]
In the third gaming system 1A, a data display device 4, which is a type of gaming device, is provided corresponding to a pachinko machine 2 that plays a game using pachinko balls. The data display device 4 includes a first display unit 430 capable of displaying an image, and a third communication unit for receiving a possession ball signal from the inter-table counting unit 3 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2. The processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 executes display control to display the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430 when the number of possessed balls specified based on the possessed ball signal reaches the first display threshold, and When the first predetermined image is displayed on the 1 display unit 430, even if the number of possessed balls falls below the first display threshold, if the first non-display threshold smaller than the first display threshold by a predetermined number is reached (1) The non-display control of non-displaying the first predetermined image is executed when the first predetermined image is not displayed and is lower than the first non-display threshold.

  According to this, by displaying the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430 based on the number of balls possessed by the player, the gaming state of the player playing the gaming machine and the surrounding gaming customers The (number of possession of game media) can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, the first non-display threshold for non-displaying the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first display threshold for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference of the threshold for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent frequent switching of display / non-display of the predetermined image due to the increase or decrease of the number of possession balls near the threshold.

[3-10. Modified example]
The possessed ball special display control process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 is not limited to the process described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the modification of possession ball special display control processing is explained.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a flow of second possession ball special display control processing executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 in place of the possession ball special display control processing of FIG.

  The possession ball special display control unit 415 calculates the first unit number of balls = the number of possession balls− (first display counter value × first display threshold) (F1). In addition, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 calculates the second unit number of balls = the possessed number of balls-(second display counter value x second unit number of balls) (F3). Here, the first unit ball number is the possessed ball number normalized to a numerical range of 0 to 1000, in order to enable threshold determination using the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold. The second unit sphere number is the possession sphere number normalized to a numerical range of 0 to 5000 shots so as to enable threshold determination using the second display threshold and the second non-display threshold.

  Next, the possession ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the first unit ball number has reached the first display threshold (F5), and if it is determined that it has reached (F5; Yes), the first display Add 1 to the counter value (F7). Then, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the second unit ball number has reached the second display threshold (F9), and if it is determined that the second unit sphere has reached (F9; Yes), the second display It is controlled to display the second predetermined image of the number according to the counter value on the first display unit 430 (F11).

  Next, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 performs control to erase all the display of the first predetermined image from the first display unit 430 (F13). Then, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 adds 1 to the second display counter value (F15), resets the first display counter value (F17), and ends the second possessed ball special display control process. .

  If it is determined in F9 that the second unit ball number has not reached the second display threshold (F9; No), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines the number of first predetermined images according to the first display counter value. Are controlled to be displayed on the first display unit 430 (F19). Then, the second possession ball special display control process is ended.

  If it is determined in F5 that the first unit ball number has not reached the first display threshold (F5; No), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether the first unit ball number has fallen below the first non-display threshold It is determined whether or not it is (F21).

  If it is determined that the first unit ball number has fallen below the first non-display threshold (F21; Yes), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether the first display counter value is 0 (F23) If it is determined that the value is not 0 (F23; No), 1 is subtracted from the first display counter value (F25). Then, control is performed to cause the first display unit 430 to display the first predetermined image of the number according to the first display counter value (F27).

  Thereafter, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether the second unit ball number is below the second non-display threshold (F29). Then, if it is determined that it is below (F29; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second display counter value is 0 (F31), and if it is not 0 (F31; No), the second display Subtract 1 from the counter value (F33). Then, after the control for causing the first display unit 430 to display the second predetermined image of the number according to the second display counter value (F35), the second possession ball special display control processing is ended.

  Also by performing such second possession ball special display control processing, the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are appropriately displayed / non-displayed according to the number of possession balls of the player, and the game is played on the gaming machine It is possible to notify the player or the surrounding game customers of the gaming state (the number of possession of game media) of the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[4. Fourth embodiment]
[4-1. Configuration of gaming system]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of a system configuration of a fourth gaming system 1B in the fourth embodiment. The fourth gaming system 1B is a type of gaming device and counting device provided corresponding to each of the plurality of pachinko machines 2 which are a type of gaming machines installed on a gaming island (not shown) and each pachinko machine 2 Card unit 3, Hall computer 6 which is a kind of control device and management device, ball management computer 8 which is a kind of control device and management device, gaming devices and information provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2 It comprises and the ringing lamp apparatus 9 which is 1 type of a display apparatus.

  A card unit 3 is installed on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2 in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 and issued to a visitor player who is not registered as a member in the game arcade The visitor card, which is a recording medium for recording, and the membership card, which is a recording medium for gaming issued to a member player who has made member registration in the game arcade, are accepted, and the visitor card or the membership card (hereinafter collectively referred to A game medium used for playing a game on the pachinko machine 2 based on the value (prepaid balance) of the valuable value specified from the game value identification information (prepaid balance data) recorded in the card). Processing for lending a certain pachinko ball, counting pachinko balls acquired in the game in the pachinko machine 2 and paying out pachinko balls within the range of the counted pachinko ball number Vinegar processing is performed.

  The call lamp device 9 is a type of information display device having a horizontally long box shape in a front view, and is used by a player playing a game with the pachinko machine 2 to call a clerk, and from the pachinko machine 2 The game information on the pachinko machine 2 is displayed on a display unit provided on the front in response to the signal.

  Each pachinko machine 2 is configured to be individually identifiable by machine number, and pachinko machine 2, card unit 3 and call lamp device 9 are connected to a hall computer 6 and a ball management computer 8 through a base terminal. ing. In FIG. 1, four pachinko machines 2 installed on the game island are shown for the sake of simplicity.

[4-2. Information and Signal Flow]
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of information and signals between the devices of the fourth gaming system 1B.

  From the pachinko machine 2, signals relating to the game such as a big hit medium signal, a definite change medium signal, a time medium short signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal are output to the call lamp device 9 and the hall computer 6.

  From the card unit 3, a possessing ball signal representing the number of balls possessed by the player counted by the count payout unit 380 and a card ejection signal are output to the call lamp device 9. Further, from the card unit 3, card information recorded in a member card or visitor card being accepted is output to the ball management computer 8.

  Further, from the hall computer 6, a display instruction signal for causing the display unit of the call lamp device 9 to perform a predetermined display is output to the call lamp device 9.

[4-3. Configuration of Pachinko Machine and Card Unit]
FIG. 43 is a front view showing an appearance configuration of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, since the structure of the pachinko machine 2 is the same as 3rd Embodiment, the description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted.

  On the front of the card unit 3, there are a multi-functional lamp 301 which can be informed of the condition of the card unit 3 by a full color LED and lit in a plurality of colors, and a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills. A protruding portion 305 formed on the front side of the apparatus from the front of the apparatus, a dispensing button 311 for accepting a counting dispensing operation for dispensing the number of counted balls, and a card for inserting a membership card or a visitor card An insertion slot 309 is provided.

  A card slot 309 provided on the front of the card unit 3 is connected to a card slot 392 of a card reader / writer 327 built in at a position corresponding to the card slot 309. The visitor card and the membership card can be inserted into the card slot 392.

  Here, the visitor card and the membership card execute nonvolatile memory for storing various data, rewrite and read out of the recorded information, and control to implement non-contact communication with an external reader / writer device. An IC card having an IC chip having a unit and a card is used. A card ID capable of identifying each card is stored in advance in a non-rewritable manner in each of the visitor card and the membership card. Then, while the type is made distinguishable from the card ID, various data such as prepaid balance data capable of specifying the prepaid balance and a distribution flag capable of specifying the presence or absence of distribution are stored.

  The member card is issued to the member player who has performed member registration in the game arcade, and the member ID given to the member is stored in a non-rewritable manner. In addition, as described later, the member player using the member card can use the pachinko balls obtained and counted once for the next day or later to use the balls for the game or to exchange for prizes. However, the number of stored balls, which is the number of pachinko balls for which the stored balls have been made, is not directly recorded in the member card, and the number of stored balls is the ball management computer as described later. In 8, the membership card ID and the membership ID are stored in association with each other, whereby the membership card ID and the membership ID are specified.

  Further, the number of balls held based on the counted number of balls counted by the player who holds the member card is not directly recorded in the member card, and the number of balls is also recorded with the member card ID as described later. It is specified from the member card ID and the member ID by being stored in association with the member ID, and the number of balls is only for that day in each card unit 3 in the game arcade It can be used and can be used for prize exchange at a prize exchange POS terminal (not shown).

  In addition, the visitor card is purchased and issued by a card issuing / payment machine (not shown) installed in the game arcade, and is issued also by the card unit 3. In the visitor card, the number of balls possessed and the date are stored based on the counted number of balls counted by the player who owns the visitor card, and the number of balls in each game hall is recorded only on that day. The card unit 3 can be used for gaming, and can be used for prize exchange at a prize exchange POS terminal.

  Further, on the front surface of the card unit 3, a projecting portion 305 is provided in a manner of projecting forward. In the projecting portion 305, on the surface facing the player, a display unit 340 capable of displaying various information, a menu button 316 for displaying a main menu screen, and a table data button 318 for displaying table data When the member card is received, the replay button 319 for performing the replay game using the membership card ID recorded in the membership card and the number of balls identified by the member ID, and the replay button 319 And an IR light receiving unit 315 that receives an infrared signal from a setting remote controller owned by a staff at the game arcade, converts it into an electric signal, and outputs the signal. Are provided on the surface of the display unit 340 so that each display item displayed on the display unit 340 can be input by finger touch. Akira touch panel 314 is provided.

  Further, in the inside of the projecting portion 305, a liquid crystal display 313 which will be described later, which constitutes the display unit 340, and switches corresponding to respective bons are provided, and these are provided at positions in the device corresponding to the projecting portion 305. By being connected to the display control substrate 329, display control of the liquid crystal display 313, input position detection by the transparent touch panel 314, and the like are performed by the display control substrate 329.

  The upper position in the card unit 3 is continuously connected to the bill insertion slot 302. The bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken in and identification of its authenticity and bill type is carried out. The bill identification unit 302 for outputting to a control unit 305, which will be described later, provided in the unit is provided. In the bill identification unit 302, various bills (each of 10,000 yen, 5,000 yen, 2,000 yen, 1,000 yen) are provided. Banknotes are accepted.

  In addition, a control unit 305 for controlling the operation of the card unit 3 is provided at a substantially central position of the card unit 3 so as to facilitate connection with each part constituting the card unit 3, as will be described later. The control unit 305 controls various operations of the card unit 3.

  In the lowermost position of the card unit 3, pachinko balls are counted and taken in, and the counted pachinko balls are the maximum fractions, that is, less than 25 fractions which are the payout units in the corresponding pachinko machine 2 While storing only 24 pieces which is the maximum value, a counting and paying unit 380 is provided for counting and paying out pachinko balls having fractions less than the unit.

[4-4. Functional configuration of card unit]
FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing an example of a functional configuration of the card unit 3.
The card unit 3 controls various units of the card unit 3 by executing control of each unit of the bill recognition unit 302, the card reader / writer 327, the display control board 329, and the card unit 3 by a control program. The bill identification unit 302, the card reader / writer 327, and the display control board 329 are connected to the control unit 305 so that various data can be transmitted and received.

  The card reader / writer 327 reads and writes recorded information such as a member card inserted from the card insertion slot 309 and a (member) card ID recorded on a visitor card, a member ID (member card only), prepaid balance data, etc. I do.

  The control unit 305 includes a CPU 310, a ROM 320, a RAM 330, and an RTC 340.

  The CPU 310 is a control device and an arithmetic device that centrally control the card unit 3. In the present embodiment, the CPU 310 includes a possessed ball special display control unit 311 as a main functional unit.

  The ROM 320 is a non-volatile read-only storage device, and includes a CU processing program 321 read by the CPU 310 and executed as CU processing (see FIG. 48 and FIG. 49), and a holding ball special display threshold table 322. I remember.

  The CU processing program 321 includes, as a subroutine, a possessed ball special display control program 321 a that is executed as possessed ball special display control processing. The CU processing will be described later in detail using a flowchart. Further, as the possessed ball special display control process, the possessed ball special display control process (refer to FIG. 32) described in the third embodiment can be applied as it is, and therefore, the description thereof will not be repeated. Further, since the owning ball special display threshold table 322 can be applied as it is to the owning ball special display threshold table 494 (see FIG. 26) described in the third embodiment, the description for the second time will be omitted.

  The RAM 330 is a volatile readable and writable storage device, and corresponds to the (member) card ID of the visitor card or membership card currently accepted by the card reader / writer 327 and the prepaid balance, the number of balls held, the number of savings, the number of visit points, It stores various data such as the machine data of the pachinko machine 2 to be played and the game information of the member in the game. The RAM 330 is backed up by a battery (not shown), and retains data stored for a predetermined period even if the power is shut off.

Card data 331 and processing data 332 are stored in the RAM 330.
The processing data 332 is processing data for the CPU 310 to display the possessed ball special display in the possessed ball special display control process (see FIG. 32), and the first display counter value, the second display counter value, Data for processing such as an integer n and a second integer m are temporarily stored.

  As described above, the control unit 305 is connected in a practicable manner to receive and transmit various signals associated with lending of pachinko balls with a prize ball control board (not shown) provided on the pachinko machine 2 and As described above, by being connected to the information output board of the pachinko machine 2 via the signal cable, various external output signals such as a big hit, medium signal and the like can be input.

  Further, the control unit 305 is connected to an out ball counter 16 provided at the lower position of the corresponding pachinko machine 2 so that the input ball signal by the out ball counter 16 can be input. In response to the input of the hit ball signal from the ball counter 16, a predetermined number corresponding to the hit ball signal is added and updated to the value of the total number of hit balls in the game information table described later.

  Further, the control unit 305 is connected to the counting and dispensing unit 380, and inputs a counting sensor signal output by counting of pachinko balls in the counting and dispensing unit 380, and based on the counting sensor signal Update the number of balls held. For example, as described above, pachinko balls flowing into the counting and dispensing unit 380 are detected by the counting sensor, and a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is sent from the counting and dispensing unit 380 to the control unit 305 according to detection of one pachinko ball. The number of possession balls (number of balls possessed) stored in the control unit 305 is increased by one. The configuration of the counting and dispensing unit 380 is the same as that of the counting and dispensing unit 380 provided in the inter-table counting unit 3 of the third embodiment, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  Further, the control unit 305 is connected to a payout button switch 311 ′ corresponding to the payout button 311 provided at the lower position of the projecting portion 305 on the front of the device, and the signal corresponding to the operation of the payout button 311 is the payout By inputting from the button switch 311 ′, it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of the operation of the payout button 311. When it is detected that the payout button 311 is pressed, the control unit 305 repays the player a predetermined number of unit balls out of the number of owned balls. As in the third embodiment, the number of unit balls to be refunded to the player in one refund operation will be described as 125. The control unit 305 subtracts 125 from the stored possession ball number every time one refund operation is performed. However, if the number of owned balls is less than 125 and the refund operation is performed, the number of owned balls is set to 0. That is, the number of balls corresponding to the stored number of balls is subtracted.

  As in the third embodiment, when the number of balls possessed by the player increases, the pachinko balls ejected from the pachinko machine 2 are counted from the lower plate 24 by keeping the player pulling the count lever 341. When it flows into the passage 343 at any time and increases by being counted by the counting payout unit 380 as needed, the player collects the pachinko balls ejected from the pachinko machine 2 without pulling the counting lever 341 in the lower tray. If the pachinko balls are accumulated to a certain extent and the counting lever 341 is pulled to some extent, the accumulated pachinko balls flow into the counting passage 343 at a stroke and are counted by the counting and dispensing unit 380 and are rapidly increased. There are two cases. In the case where the player's ball number decreases, it is a case where pachinko balls are refunded to the player by the player's refund operation, and as described above, the number of refunds by one refund operation is 125. The number of balls held decreases by 125 per one refund operation.

  Also, as described above, the control unit 305 has a balance display provided on the operation unit of the corresponding pachinko machine 2, a loan button switch for detecting the operation of the loan button, and a member card or visitor card being received. A return button switch for detecting the operation of the return button operated when returning the key is connected, and it is possible to detect the operation of the lending button and the operation of the return button, and carry out display control of these balance displays.

  The control unit 305 outputs various information input from the display control board 329 according to the output from the IR light receiving unit 315 according to the transmission from the remote control, the operation of various buttons provided on the projecting portion 305, and the operation of the touch panel. Full color provided in the multi-function lamp connected to the control unit 305 upon receipt of money identification information by the bill identification unit 302, card insertion information from the card reader / writer 327, storage state information of a visitor card, etc. The overall operation control is performed such as lighting control of each LED such as the LED 301a, control of the card reader / writer 327, control of the display control board 329, display control of the balance indicator, and the like.

  In addition, the control unit 305 is based on prepaid balance data read out from a member card or visitor card which is accepted, and determines whether or not the use of the membership card or visitor card inserted in the card insertion slot 309 is permitted. Credit processing to lend the ball using the prepaid balance, deposit to the prepaid balance remaining on the member card or visitor card being received, depending on the acceptance of money, or write the prepaid balance on a new visitor card and issue it Issue / payment process, return process for returning member card or visitor card being accepted by return operation by return button, replay process using the number of stored balls, counted number of balls by acceptance of operation of payout button 311 (insertion Including the number of balls identified by the accepted visitor card and membership card) Went the payout La (return) to execute the processing of the payout processing for subtraction update the number of balls that issued 該払 from the counting finished ball number.

  Further, the control unit 305 is communicably connected to external devices such as the hall computer 6 and the ball management computer 8 connected to the local area network (LAN) through the communication unit 334 and the HUB. Transmission and reception of various data with each of these computers is enabled through the communication unit.

  The display control board 329 connected to the control unit 305 includes a liquid crystal display 313 forming the display unit 340, a transparent touch panel 314, various switches (a menu switch 316a corresponding to the menu button 316, a table data button 318). Electronic components such as the corresponding table data switch 318a and the replay switch 319a) corresponding to the replay button 319, the IR light receiving unit 315, and the LED 320a provided in the replay display unit 320 described above are connected. Information based on operation information of the transparent touch panel 314, operation information of various switches, and information based on an output signal output from the IR light receiving unit 315 is output to the control unit 305 via the display control board 329.

  In the display control substrate 329 of the present embodiment, a position where a pressing operation is performed is specified based on an output signal from the display drive circuit (not shown) for performing display drive of the liquid crystal display 313 or the transparent touch panel 314 An input position detection circuit (not shown) for outputting specified input position information, a VDP (not shown) for processing a display image to be displayed on the display unit 340, and a VROM for storing image data used for menu display etc. (Not shown), VRAM (not shown) for temporarily storing display data to be displayed on the display unit 340, or independent of the control unit 305, judgment and processing associated with input of various switches, touch panels, etc. Based on the display data (page data) output from the control unit 305, etc. The display screen, and is capable of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 313 constituting the display unit 340.

  The card unit 3 may be a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who is not registered as a member, or a member game registered as a member in the game arcade. Receive a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a player. The visitor card and the membership card are constituted by an IC card.

  The card unit 3 having received those cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining amount of a card, the number of balls held, the number of balls stored, etc.) of the player owned by the record information of the card into a game ball.

  Although illustration is omitted, on the front of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot for inserting a bill, and a card insertion / ejection slot for inserting a membership card or a visitor card are provided. The card reader / writer receives the membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot, and the information recorded in the card is read. The bill inserted into the bill insertion slot is taken in by a money discriminator (not shown) to identify its authenticity or bill type.

  When a member card is received on the front face of the card unit 3, a member card ID (hereinafter simply referred to as a "card ID") recorded on the member card and the card ID are specified. A replay button for implementing replay game using the number of balls is provided.

  The display displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as the remaining amount of the card or simply the remaining amount) recorded in the inserted game recording medium (card). While this display can display the number of game balls and other various information, the surface is made of a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be performed by touching various display items displayed on the display of the display with a finger. Can be configured.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, when the number of balls acquired by the player is recorded in the inserted card, a part of the number of balls is withdrawn and converted to a game ball, and converted to a game ball It becomes possible to play a game by the pachinko machine 2 based on it. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a member card, the number of balls is not recorded, and the balls are recorded in the ball management computer 8, some of the balls are withdrawn and the game is played It is converted into a ball, and the pachinko machine 2 can play a game. That is, when both the ball and the ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the ball is preferentially withdrawn. In addition to the re-play button 319, a dedicated ball withdrawal button may be provided to withdraw balls, and the re-play button may be a dedicated button for storing balls.

  Here, a "reserved ball" is a ball which has been acquired in the day before and is deposited in a hole, and becomes a game ball by the withdrawal of the stored ball. The balls are game media deposited in the game arcade and are managed by the ball management computer 8.

  The "balls" is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by the ball-out. In addition, the number of balls held is the number of balls recorded on the card as the result of the player playing a game with the gaming machine, and the number of balls not yet deposited in the game arcade. It is. Generally speaking, the number of balls the player has acquired on the day at the game arcade is called "bearing ball", and the number of balls acquired by the player before the previous day is the number of balls deposited at the game arcade "pool ball". say.

  The "game ball" is a ball that can be shot by a game machine, and is generated in exchange for debiting the remaining amount of prepaid card, balls or balls.

  In addition, the difference between “balls” and “balls” is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade and the number of balls deposited in the game arcade or stage not yet deposited in the game arcade Because it is the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls, "balls having balls" may be managed by the ball management computer 8 installed in the store.

  In this embodiment, the ball storage data is not directly recorded in the membership card, but is stored in the ball management computer 8 installed in the store in association with the membership card number, and the corresponding balls can be searched based on the membership card number Is configured. On the other hand, balls are recorded directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the ball management computer 8 in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, balls are recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and balls may be stored in the ball management computer 8 in association with the card numbers.

  Note that the timing for storing the balls in the card (member card, visitor card) or the ball management computer 8 may be the timing every time the counting button is operated and the counting process is performed, or as the timing every fixed time It may be good, or it may be the timing to return the card.

  In addition, when the player finishes playing the game and receives a return of the card from the card unit 3, the balls stored in the card unit 3 are temporarily stored in the ball management computer 8 as balls, and the player When a card is inserted into the same or another card unit 3 again on the same day as the day the card is returned, only the balls for the day that were once stored as a ball are stored again in that card unit 3, The game ball may be added within the range of the ball to be able to play a game.

  At the front of the card unit 3, a lending button 321 and a card return button 322 are provided.

  The lending button 321 is a button for deducting the remaining amount recorded in the inserted card and performing an operation (a conversion operation to a game ball) for use in the game by the pachinko machine 2. That is, it is an operation button for a player to pay back pachinko balls.

  The card return button 322 is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of determined game balls at the end of the game for the inserted card (number of balls possessed at the time of card insertion-number of conversions to game balls + count) It is an operation button for storing and discharging the number of balls held by the operation).

[4-5. Functional configuration of the ball management computer]
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of a functional configuration of the ball holding management computer 8.
The ball holding management computer 8 includes a processing unit 810, an operation unit 820, a display unit 830, a sound output unit 835, a communication unit 840, a clock unit 850, and a storage unit 860.

  The processing unit 810 is a control device and an arithmetic device that generally controls each part of the ball management computer 8 in accordance with various programs such as a system program stored in the storage unit 860, and has a processor such as a CPU Configured

  The operation unit 820 is an input unit configured to have, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a signal (operation signal) of the pressed key or button to the processing unit 810.

  The display unit 830 is a display device that performs various displays based on the display control signal output from the processing unit 810, and includes an LCD or the like. In the display unit 830, the contents of data of various databases stored in the storage unit 860 are displayed.

  The sound output unit 835 is a sound output device that performs various sound outputs based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 810. From the sound output unit 835, for example, when a warning is issued or an abnormality occurs, a warning sound or the like for notifying the administrator of this is output.

  The communication unit 840 is a communication device for performing communication with the card unit 3 and includes, for example, a wired communication module for performing communication via a wired cable. The communication unit 840 receives card information from the card unit 3.

  The clock unit 850 is an internal clock provided in the ball holding management computer 8 and is configured to have, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal oscillator and an oscillation circuit. The clocked time (including date) of the clock unit 850 is output to the processing unit 810 as needed.

  In the storage unit 860, a ball management program 861 executed as a ball management process by the processing unit 810, member data 863, card management data 865, and unit management data 867 are stored.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the member data 863. The member data 863 stores member information data and member game history data. The member information data stores the member's personal information. Specifically, for example, according to a member ID for uniquely identifying a member, a personal identification number set by the member himself, a visit point to be given to the member each time he visits a store, and a visit point The rank set for the member, the surname of the member, and the name of the member are stored.

  In the member game history data, a member ID, a visit date, a machine number, a model name, a start time, and an end time are stored in association with each other. The start time is the time when the member starts playing a game with the pachinko machine 2 of the machine number. The end time is the time when the member ends the game with the pachinko machine 2 of the machine number.

FIG. 47 is a view showing an example of the data configuration of the card management data 865. As shown in FIG.
The card management data 865 stores membership card management data and visitor card management data.

  The membership card management data is data for managing a membership card, and, for example, a card ID for uniquely identifying a membership card, a member ID, the number of balls (4 yen balls and 1 yen balls) The number), the number of stored balls (the number of 4-yen stored balls and the number of 1-yen stored balls), and the number of big hits are stored in association with each other. Here, the part that stores (manages) the number of balls in association with the member ID corresponds to the ball DB of the member management device 162 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

  The visitor card management data is data for managing a visitor card, and for example, a card ID for making the visitor card unique, a latest issue date which is the latest issue date of the visitor card, and a number of balls The number of balls with 4 yen and the number of balls with 1 yen) are stored in association with the number of big hits.

[4-6. Processing flow]
FIGS. 48 and 49 are flowcharts showing a flow of CU processing (card unit processing) executed by the CPU 310 of the card unit 3 in accordance with the CU processing program 321 stored in the ROM 320.

  First, the CPU 310 determines whether a card return operation has been performed (H1). If it is determined that a card return operation has been performed (H1; Yes), the card return process is performed (H3). Specifically, a process of discharging the inserted card to the card return port is performed. Then, the CPU 310 shifts the processing to H21.

  In this card return process, it is possible to select the number of balls to be returned and the loan rate of the number of balls to be returned. In this example, since the lending rate of the card unit 3 is 4 yen, the number of balls and the number of balls are usually returned for 4 yen, but when the lending rate of 1 yen is selected, the number of balls and the number of balls Is returned for 1 yen. In addition, the number of balls and the number of balls may be forcibly returned for 1 yen or 4 yen by setting in advance. Here, when the loan rate of the card unit 3 is 1 yen and returned for 4 yen, if the number of stored balls or the number of balls for 1 yen is a fraction that can not be converted to the number of balls for 4 yen or the number of balls However, the fraction may be paid out or discarded depending on the setting.

  If it is determined that the card return operation has not been performed (H1; No), the CPU 310 determines whether or not the ball addition operation has been performed (H5), and if it is determined that the ball return operation has been performed (H5; Yes), A summation process is performed (H7). Then, the CPU 310 shifts the processing to H21.

  If it is determined that the ball-counting operation has not been performed (H5; No), the CPU 310 determines whether the card lock operation has been performed (H9). If it is determined that the card-locking operation has been performed (I9; Yes), the card lock is determined. Perform processing (H11). Specifically, the card inserted is locked so as not to be returned only by pressing the card return button 322. After the lock, for example, the player is requested to input a personal identification number, and the card is not returned to the player unless the correct personal identification number is input. Then, the CPU 310 shifts the processing to H21.

  If it is determined that the card lock operation has not been performed (H9; No), the CPU 310 determines whether or not the ball division operation has been performed (H13). If it is determined that the card lock operation has been performed (H13; Yes), The division process is performed (H15). Then, the CPU 310 shifts the processing to H21.

  If it is determined that the ball dividing operation has not been performed (H13; No), the CPU 310 determines whether the information inquiry operation has been performed (H17), and if it is determined that it has been performed (H17; Yes), the information inquiry Perform processing (H19). Specifically, in accordance with the operation of the player, information such as the prepaid balance (payment balance), the number of balls held, the number of balls, etc. is displayed on the display unit 330. Then, the CPU 310 shifts the processing to H21.

  Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not the counting result is input from the counting and dispensing unit 380 (H21), and if it is determined that the counting result is input (H21; Yes), the possession ball number data 331a is updated (H23). Then, the CPU 310 executes the possessed ball special display control process (see FIG. 32) in accordance with the possessed ball special display control program 321a stored in the ROM 320 (H25).

  Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not the replay button 319 has been pressed (H27), and if it is determined that the replay button 319 has been pressed (H27; Yes), performs ball withdrawal control processing (H29). Then, after updating the possessed ball number data 331a (H31), the CPU 310 executes possessed ball special display control processing (see FIG. 32) according to the possessed ball special display control program 321a stored in the ROM 320 (H33).

  Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not the "storage conversion button" (not shown) displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 is pressed (H35), and if it is determined that the storage button is pressed (H35; Yes) Perform processing (H37). Although this ball storage conversion process is substantially the same as the conversion process described in FIG. 7, since the loan rate of the card unit 3 of this example is 4 yen, the conversion from 1 yen ball number to 4 yen ball number is a row In the figure, “4 yen ball number” is replaced with “1 yen ball number”, and “1 yen ball number” is read as “4 yen ball number”.

  Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not the “ball conversion button” (not shown) displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 is pressed (H39), and if it is determined that the button is pressed (H39; Yes), Ball conversion processing is performed (H41). This ball conversion process is substantially the same as the conversion process described in FIG. 7, but since the loan rate of the card unit 3 of this example is 4 yen, the number of balls with 1 yen to the number of balls with 4 yen is used. Conversion is performed, and "4 yen ball number of balls" in the figure is read as "1 yen ball number", and conversely, "1 yen ball number" is read as "4 yen ball number".

  In the storage ball conversion processing and the ball conversion processing, since the conversion from 1 yen to 4 yen, the above-described S107 and S108 are applied. In S101, in addition to the processing of all or part of payment, ball lending, storage ball replay, and card return, all or part of ball totaling (H7), ball division (H15), and counting The process is locked, and in S120, the locked process is released. As in the first embodiment, conversion is locked during processing of ball addition, ball division, and counting.

  Thereafter, the CPU 310 determines whether to end the process (H43), and when it is determined to continue the process (H43; No), returns the process to H1. If it is determined that the processing is to be ended (H43; Yes), the card unit processing is ended.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the flow of the ball combining process.
The ball combining process is a process of adding balls associated with a plurality of cards and associating them with one card.

  The CPU 310 determines whether a membership card is being received (J3). If a member card is being received (J3; Yes), the CPU 310 instructs to input a personal identification number (J5). Next, the CPU 310 determines whether the verification result is OK (J7), and if OK (J7; Yes), determines whether or not there is a ball in the member card (J9).

  If it is determined that there is a ball (J9; Yes), the CPU 310 changes the visitor card at the reading position of the card reader / writer 327 to invalid and discharges the membership card (J11). Then, the CPU 310 instructs the player to insert a membership card or a visitor card (J13).

  Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not the card is inserted within a predetermined time (J15), and when it is determined that the card is inserted (J15; Yes), the balls are transferred to the insertion card (J17). Then, after transmitting the card information of the inserted card to the ball holding management computer 8 (J19), the CPU 310 ejects the inserted card (J21). Then, the CPU 310 ends the ball-addition processing.

  If the determination result of J3, J7, J9 or J15 is a negative determination, the CPU 310 gives an error notification (J23). Then, the CPU 310 ends the ball-addition processing.

  In addition, it may be made possible to select the loan rate (4 yen or 1 yen) of the ball having balls to be added in the ball having a ball total process.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the flow of the ball dividing process.
The ball dividing process is a process of dividing balls of one card (division original card) and associating the balls with a plurality of cards. In the present embodiment, among the balls of the accepted membership card (hereinafter referred to as “division source card”), some balls are referred to as another new visitor card (hereinafter referred to as “division destination card”). Match the remaining balls to the original division card.

  First, the CPU 310 instructs to input a password (K3). Next, it is judged whether the collation result is OK or not (K5), and if it is judged OK (K5; Yes), whether or not the number of balls is twice or more the number corresponding to the lending unit amount (K7). When the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the loan unit amount (K7; No), usually it is not possible to pay out the balls, so the number of balls can be calculated by combining the card and the card to be divided. Needs to be at least twice the number equivalent to the loan unit amount.

  If it is determined that the number is two or more (K7; Yes), the CPU 310 controls to display a screen for inputting the number of balls to be divided (K9). The number of divisions may be selected from options, may be increased or decreased in units corresponding to the loan unit amount by operating the increase or decrease button, or may be directly input numerically You may do so.

  The CPU 310 stands by until the number of divisions is input (K11; No), and when it is determined that the number of divisions is input (K11; Yes), determines whether or not the membership card is being received (K13). If it is determined that the member card is being received (K13; Yes), the CPU 310 subtracts the number of divisions from the number of balls held (K15).

  Next, the CPU 310 ejects the membership card (K17). Next, the CPU 310 takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit provided in the card reader / writer to the reading position, and performs the issuing process of the taken out visitor card (K19). Specifically, the status of the visitor savings management table of the ball management computer 8 is changed during use, the latest issuance date is updated, and the latest issuance date of the visitor savings management table of the ball management computer 8 is updated. , Reset other items in both tables.

  Then, the CPU 310 associates the division number with the visitor card as the number of balls possessed (K21). Specifically, the number of divisions is stored as the number of balls in the visitor savings management table of the ball management computer 8. Next, the CPU 310 ejects the visitor card (K23).

  Next, the CPU 310 notifies that the re-insertion of the membership card discharged earlier is urged (K25). The CPU 310 stands by until the membership card is inserted (K27; Yes), and if inserted (K27; Yes), transmits card information to the ball bearing management computer 8 (K41). Then, the CPU 310 ends the ball dividing process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the membership card is not being received (K13; No), the CPU 310 temporarily saves the card information of the visitor card being received to another memory area (K29). Then, the CPU 310 resets the card information of the visitor card at the reading / writing position being accepted, and performs the issuing process (K31). Next, the CPU 310 records the division number as the number of balls on the visitor card (K33), and discharges the visitor card (K35).

  Next, the CPU 310 takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit of the card reader / writer to the reading position, and performs the issuing process of the taken out visitor card (K37). Then, the CPU 310 records the card information evacuated in K29 on the visitor card (K39). Then, the CPU 310 shifts the processing to K41.

  In addition, in the ball-bearing division process, it may be possible to select the loan rate (4 yen or 1 yen) for ball-holding to be split.

[4-7. Display screen]
FIG. 52 is a view showing an example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 313 of the card unit 3.
The liquid crystal display 313 displays a possession ball special display according to the number of possession balls of the player and the number of possession balls.

  The possession ball special display is a special display according to the possession ball of the player, and FIG. 52 shows a state in which the dollar box is displayed as the first predetermined image and the special box is displayed as the second predetermined image. The display method of these images is the same as that of the third embodiment, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated. In addition, as a display mode of not only FIG. 52 but a 1st predetermined image and a 2nd predetermined image, it is possible to apply various display modes as shown in FIG. 37-FIG. 39 by 3rd Embodiment. .

  In addition, the possessed ball number is the player's current possessed ball number, and is displayed and updated in real time based on the counting result output from the count payout unit 380 and the number of refunds paid out by the player.

[4-8. Action effect]
In the fourth gaming system 1B, a card unit 3 is provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 to play a game using pachinko balls. The card unit 3 includes a display unit 340 capable of displaying an image, and a counting payout unit 380 capable of counting the number of balls possessed by a player playing a game on the pachinko machine 2. The display control board 329 performs display control for causing the display unit 340 to display a first predetermined image when the number of possessed balls counted by the counting and dispensing unit 380 reaches the first display threshold, and the display unit 340. If the number of possessed balls reaches the first non-display threshold smaller by a predetermined number than the first display threshold when the first predetermined image is displayed, the first predetermined image is not hidden and the first non-display threshold And the non-display control for making the first predetermined image non-displayed.

  According to this, the number of balls possessed by the player playing the game in the gaming machine is counted by the counting payout unit 380, and the first predetermined image is displayed on the display unit 340 based on the counted number of balls possessed. It is possible to realize an intuitive and easy-to-understand display indicating the number of balls possessed. Further, the first non-display threshold for non-displaying the first predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first display threshold for displaying the first predetermined image. By providing the difference of the threshold value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being switched due to the increase or decrease of the possession number of balls in the vicinity of the threshold value.

[4-9. Modified example]
In the ball addition processing and ball division processing performed by the card unit 3, exceptional processing relating to the possession ball special display may be performed. Specifically, for example, when the balls are divided in the ball dividing process, the possession recorded on the card of the division source based on the number of possession balls (number of balls) recorded on the card before division The number of displayed images in the number of balls and the number of displayed images in the number of owned balls recorded on the card of the division destination may be determined.

For example, it is assumed that the number of owned balls is 3,100 and the player divides the number into 1,900 and 1,200. The number of balls recorded on the card of the division source is 1900, and the number of balls recorded on the card of the division target is 1200. According to the possession ball special display control process described above, the number of displayed first predetermined images is 3 when the number of possession balls is 3,100. Therefore, for example, the display number of the first predetermined image is distributed so that the sum of the display number of the first predetermined image is 3 between the card of the division source and the card of the division destination. Specifically, although the number of balls possessed is 1900 for the card of the division source, the number of display of the first predetermined image in this case is exceptionally 2 and the number of balls possessed is 1200 for the card of the division target Therefore, the display number of the first predetermined image is set to 1 in principle.
The same applies to the second predetermined image.

  As a specific process, the number of display of the predetermined image (hereinafter referred to as "total number of display") is determined based on the number of possession balls recorded on the card before division. Then, when the balls are divided, the number of balls recorded on the division source card and the number of balls stored on the division destination card correspond to the number of balls held on each card. Determine the display counter value.

  The display counter value (hereinafter referred to as "division source card display counter value") corresponding to the possession number of division source cards and the display counter value corresponding to the possession number of division destination cards (hereinafter referred to as "division destination card display When the sum with “the counter value” is the same as the total display number described above, the predetermined image is displayed based on the display counter value as it is. On the other hand, when the sum of the division source card display counter value and the division destination card display counter value is different from the total display number described above, the division source card display counter value and the division destination card display counter value are compensated to compensate for the difference. Correct one or the other. The correction process of the display counter value is performed for each of the first display counter value and the second display counter value.

  Further, in this case, it is preferable that the division source card display counter value and the division destination card display counter value be respectively recorded on the division source card and the division destination card. By doing this, when the player moves to another pachinko machine 2 to play a game, the card unit 3 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 of the move destination is recorded in the accepted card. The number of predetermined images to be displayed can be determined based on the display counter value.

  Further, when the ball-in-ball totaling process is performed, the CPU 310 of the card unit 3 performs the above-mentioned ball-in-ball special display control process on the basis of the number of balls possessed recorded in the card being received, The value and the second display counter value may be set, and a predetermined image may be displayed based on these counter values.

  As in the ball dividing process, the display counter value corresponding to the possession ball number in the total result is recorded in the card in the ball totaling process, and the player moves to another pachinko machine 2 to play a game In this case, the card unit 3 provided corresponding to the destination pachinko machine 2 may determine the number of predetermined images to be displayed based on the display counter value recorded on the accepted card.

[5. Fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, in the second display section 440 of the data display device 4 described in the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 played by the player is (1) the only game model played by the player alone, (2 ) The long game model where the gaming time of the player is longer than the first predetermined time, (3) the first gaming model that the player played first, (4) the gaming time of the player than the second predetermined time This is an embodiment for displaying information on the result of counting which of the one or more game models of the short short game model is a game model.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 described in the third embodiment shows the number of times pachinko balls have passed through the first area of the game area in the game with the pachinko machine 2 and This is an embodiment of displaying information on the tabulated result of tabling balls, according to the firing intensity of the pachinko balls, and / or the ratio and the number and / or the rate of the pachinko balls passing through the second area of the game area.

  The processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 determines the type of game played by the player based on the card information recorded on the membership card inserted in the card unit 3 provided to the pachinko machine 2. Although illustration is omitted, in the card information, in association with the member ID, the game time at which the player plays the pachinko machine 2 is recorded for each ID of the pachinko machine 2. The game time includes the game start time when the game with the pachinko machine 2 is started and the game end time when the game with the pachinko machine 2 is over. The processing unit 410 determines which of the above-described (1) to (4) gaming models the gaming machine in which the player has played is based on these gaming times.

  An example of the determination method of the gaming machine will be described. If there is only one pachinko machine 2 played by a member of the member ID, it is determined that the pachinko machine 2 with that machine number is the only game model. Among the pachinko machines 2 played by the member of the member ID, the pachinko machine 2 of which the gaming time required as the time from the game start time to the game end time is longer than the first predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) Determined as a long-time gaming model. Among the pachinko machines 2 played by the member with the member ID, the pachinko machine 2 having a machine number shorter than the second predetermined time (for example, 15 minutes) is required as the time from the game start time to the game end time. Determined as a short game model. Further, among the pachinko machines 2 played by the member of the member ID, the pachinko machine 2 having the oldest game start time is determined as the first game type.

  The processing unit 410 counts, based on the determination result of the above-described gaming model, which gaming model the player has played is the gaming model, and stores the counting result in a database. Then, the processing unit 410, based on the counting result of the gaming machines stored in the database, for example, graph the gaming machines so that the surrounding gaming customers can easily view them, and displays the created graph on the second display unit 440 Control.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 in this case.
In FIG. 60 (1), the second display unit 440 displays a circle graph (machine type long game model ratio circle graph) indicating the rate at which the pachinko machine 2 is played by the player as a long time game model. . FIG. 60 (2) is a graph showing the percentage of the pachinko machine 2 being played by the player as a long-time game model in the bar graph instead of the circle graph (type-based long-time game model ratio bar graph). A long time game model ratio bar graph is displayed on the second display section 440. By performing the above-described graph display on the second display unit 440, the surrounding game customers can know the ratio of long-time gaming with the pachinko machine 2.

  In addition, although the above is an example of the display screen of the pie chart and bar graph which were created about a long-time game model, it replaces with this and only the pie chart and bar graph which were created only about a game type 2 may be displayed on the display unit 440. By performing such a display, the surrounding gaming customers can know the ratio at which only one game, the first game, and the short game are performed on the pachinko machine 2. It can be seen that the pachinko machine 2 with a high percentage of long-time gaming is a popular model, and the pachinko machine 2 with only a high percentage of gaming is a very popular model. In addition, it can be seen that the pachinko machine 2 with a high percentage of short-time gaming is a model that is not so popular. As a result, the surrounding gaming customers can judge the popular gaming machine model and the non-popular gaming machine model, and can be used as a reference when selecting the machine model to be played.

FIG. 61 is a view showing another example of the display screen of the second display unit 440. As shown in FIG.
In FIG. 61 (1), for the model A of the pachinko machine 2, a circle graph indicating the determination result of the gaming machine in which the player plays a game is displayed on the second display section 440. Specifically, for the model A, the ratio of the first game played by the player, the ratio of the short game, the ratio of the long game, and the ratio of the only game are represented in a circle graph format.

FIG. 61 (2) shows this in the form of a bar graph, and for the model A, the ratio of the player playing the first game, the ratio of playing the short time, the ratio of playing the long time and the ratio of playing the only It is displayed on the second display unit 440 in a bar graph format.
By performing such a display, surrounding gaming customers can know the rate at which the pachinko machine 2 is played as a gaming machine, a long game machine, a first game machine, and a short game model only, It can be determined whether the machine 2 is a popular model or a non-popular model.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the launcher included in the pachinko machine 2 has a launch intensity sensor that detects the launch intensity of the pachinko ball, and the launch intensity sensor detects the launch intensity of the pachinko ball launched from the launcher. Do. Then, a emission intensity signal indicating the detected emission intensity is output to the data display device 4. In addition, the pachinko machine 2 is a pass that indicates that pachinko balls have passed through the winning opening when pachinko balls driven into the game area pass through each winning opening (normal winning opening, start winning opening, large winning opening). The area signal is output to the data display device 4. At this time, the pachinko machine 2 links the emission intensity of the pachinko ball to the passing area signal and outputs it.

  The data display device 4 determines the emission intensity and passage area of the pachinko ball based on the emission intensity signal and the passage area signal output from the pachinko machine 2. Then, based on the determination result, the number and / or ratio of the pachinko balls passing the first area of the gaming area, and the number and / or the ratio of the pachinko balls passing the second area of the gaming area Are counted by the firing intensity of the pachinko ball. Here, in the first area and the second area, various winning openings (normal winning opening, starting winning opening, big winning opening) where pachinko balls are won, or divided hitting areas (right hitting) in the game area Area, left hitting area, and popping area) are included.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of a firing strength threshold range table used by the processing unit 410 to determine which hitting area a pachinko ball has been hit according to the firing strength.
A launch area and a launch intensity threshold range are stored in association with each other in the launch intensity threshold range table. The implantation area is divided into, for example, a "right-handed area", a "left-handed area", and a "bump-in area". Here, the “right hitting area” is an area on the right side of the game area, and the “left hitting area” is an area on the left side of the game area. Further, the "bump-in area" is an area in which the pachinko ball is likely to flow toward the start winning opening by the pachinko ball being hit in this area.

  In the emission intensity threshold range, the emission intensity threshold range AR (lower limit ARlow to upper limit ARhi) for the right hitting area, and for the left hitting area, the emission intensity threshold range AL (lower limit ALlow to upper limit ALhi) The firing intensity threshold range AB (lower limit value ABlow to upper limit value ABhi) is defined for the penetration region.

  The processing unit 410 counts the total number of hits and the total hit rate based on the emission intensity signal output from the pachinko machine 2. In addition, by determining to which firing intensity threshold range of the firing intensity threshold range table the firing intensity specified from the firing intensity signal is included, the impact area of the pachinko ball is determined, and the determination result is Based on the total number of implantations and the total implantation percentage are summarized by implantation area.

FIG. 63 is a view showing an example of the data configuration of the passing region data classified by emission intensity, which the processing unit 410 has tabulated.
The passing region data by firing intensity is data of the tabulated result of passing regions of pachinko balls by firing intensity, and the pachinko machine ID is associated with the passing region of pachinko balls, the total number of passes, and the passing number by firing intensity. The number-of-passings data by firing intensity and the passing rate data by firing intensity associated with the passing area of the pachinko ball, the total passing rate, and the rate of passing by firing intensity are stored.

  A first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a third starting winning opening, a first normal winning opening, a second normal winning opening, a third normal winning opening, and a special winning opening are defined in the passing area. In addition, the special winning opening includes a probability changing winning opening. For each winning opening, based on the emission intensity signal and the passing area signal output from the pachinko machine 2, the total number of passes by passing area, the number of passing by emitting intensity, the total passing rate, and the passing rate by emitting intensity are totaled It is stored in the passing region data by launch intensity.

  In the present embodiment, although it is described that each pachinko machine 2 counts both the passing number by firing intensity and the passing ratio by firing intensity, it is possible to count only any one of them. Good. That is, only the number of passing by the firing intensity may be counted, or only the passing ratio by the firing intensity may be counted.

FIG. 64 is a view showing an example of the data configuration of the launch intensity classified by firing intensity data collected by the processing unit 410. As shown in FIG.
The launch area data by launch intensity is data of the count result of the launch area of the pachinko ball by launch intensity, and the pachinko machine ID, the strike area of the pachinko ball, the total launch number and the launch number by launch intensity. And the shot number by shot intensity data associated with each other, and the shot rate by shot intensity data associated with the shot area of the pachinko ball, the total shot rate, and the shot rate by shot intensity are stored.

  The hitting area includes the right hitting area, the left hitting area and the popping area described above. The processing unit 410 adds up the total number of hits and the total hit rate based on the firing intensity signal output from the pachinko machine 2 for each hit area. In addition, by determining to which firing intensity threshold range of the firing intensity threshold range table the firing intensity specified from the firing intensity signal is included, the impact area of the pachinko ball is determined, and the determination result is Based on the number of shots by firing intensity and the percentage of shots by firing intensity according to the hitting area.

  In the present embodiment, although each pachinko machine 2 is described as counting both the number of shots by firing intensity and the ratio of shots by firing intensity, only one of them is counted. May be That is, only the number of shots for each firing intensity may be counted, or only the percentage of shots for each firing intensity may be counted.

  The processing unit 410, for example, makes it easy for the surrounding gaming customers to easily view the passing area by the firing intensity of the pachinko ball based on the counting result of the passing area (including the hitting area) by the firing intensity. A control is performed to display the created graph on the second display unit 440.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 in this case.
In FIG. 65 (1), a circle graph indicating the ratio of winning to the starting winning opening for each firing intensity is displayed on the second display section 440. Specifically, the ratio indicating the winning of the pachinko ball to the start winning opening is represented separately for the firing strengths "T0 to T9" to the firing strengths "T90 to T99".

  FIG. 65 (2) shows this in the form of a bar graph, and a bar graph indicating the ratio of winning to the starting winning opening by the firing intensity is displayed on the second display 440. By performing such a display, game players other than the player tend to pass the area where the pachinko ball is to pass according to the firing intensity, and the pachinko ball is started to the start winning opening if the handle operation is performed to any extent You can figure out what you can do.

  It should be noted that the information on the number and ratio of pachinko balls won in the normal winning opening for each firing intensity may be displayed on the second display unit 440 in a graph format, instead of the starting winning opening. In addition, information on the pachinko balls and the ratio for which winning is made to the special winning opening or the definite changing winning opening according to the firing intensity may be displayed on the second display section 440 in the form of a graph. As a result, it is possible for the surrounding game players to grasp how much the handle operation can be made to allow the pachinko ball to be won in the regular winning opening, the big winning opening, and the probability changing winning opening.

  In the present embodiment, it has been described that the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 tabulates the game types, but the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 may count the game types. In this case, the hole computer 6 may store the tabulated results in a database, and data of the tabulated results stored in the database may be transmitted to the data display device 4. Further, the ball-count management computer 8 may count the game types. Alternatively, a member management computer for managing a membership card may be installed in the store separately from the hall computer 6 and the ball-for-balls management computer 8, and the member management computer may count the game types.

  In addition, a computer having two or three functions of the hall computer 6, the ball management computer 8, and the member management computer may count the game types. That is, (1) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the ball management computer 8, (2) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the membership management computer, (3) the ball management computer 8 and the membership management computer Any one of a computer having the functions of (4) and a computer having the functions of the ball computer 6 and the ball management computer 8 and the member management computer may count the game types.

  The same applies to the counting of the passing areas by the firing intensity, and the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 does not count the passing areas by the firing intensity, but the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 performs the sorting by the firing intensity. It is also possible to count the passing areas. In this case, the pachinko machine 2 may output the above-described emission intensity signal and the passing area signal to the hall computer 6.

[6. Other embodiments]
The embodiment to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described. In addition, about the structure same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described as a normal pachinko machine 2, but it goes without saying that the gaming machine is not limited to this. As described above, the enclosed type pachinko machine may be used as the gaming machine according to the present invention instead of the normal pachinko machine 2.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing an example of an appearance configuration of the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B in this case.
The enclosed type pachinko machine 2B is rotatably supported at the one side (the left side of the casing) up and down and detachably supported at one side (the left side) of the casing, and the main components of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B An upper front frame 30A provided substantially in a lump together and a lower front frame 30B located below the upper front frame 30A and pivotally supported rotatably and vertically to one side of a housing , And a display unit 60 disposed on the front of the lower front frame 30B. In the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B, the upper front frame 30A, the lower front frame 30B, and the display unit 60 constitute a front frame of the gaming machine. The upper front frame 30A and the lower front frame 30B are separately provided, and the upper front frame 30A and the lower front frame 30B are not limited to those in which the display unit 60 is disposed on the front of the lower front frame 30B. The display unit 60 may be disposed on the front of the single integrated front frame, or may be disposed on the front of the upper front frame 30A instead of or in addition to the lower front frame 30B. May be

  The upper front frame 30A and the lower front frame 30B are separated from each other, and in the upper front frame 30A, the bearing portions 31a and 31b attached to the upper and lower sides of one side are not shown hinges of the casing of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B. By being pivotally supported by the unit, it is rotatably attached to the housing. A game board (gauge board) 20 constituting a game board surface is detachably attached to the upper front frame 30A. In the game board 20, a game area having a substantially circular outer edge surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, game balls as game media are fired and struck.

  A first special symbol display device 40A and a second special symbol display device 40B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 20 (for example, on the lower right edge of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 40A and the second special symbol display device 40B is constituted of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc., and identifies each in a special view game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as "special figures"), which are plural types of possible identification information (special identification information), are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 40A and the second special symbol display device 40B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do.

  A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 40A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 40B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  Near the center of the game area in the game board 20, an image display device 50 is provided. The image display device 50 is formed of, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display Device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 50, corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 40A in the special figure game and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 40B. For example, in the decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols which are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 50, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R are disposed. Then, in response to any one of the variation of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 40A and the variation of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 40B being started in the special figure game, In each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R, fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special view game, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, 50R on the “left”, “middle” and “right” in the image display device 50 The finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the result of variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 50, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 40A, or the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 40B. In synchronization with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols that can be identified respectively is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed (also referred to simply as "derivation").

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters are displayed on the decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, 50R. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a combination of a number, English letters, eight character images relating to a predetermined motif, numbers, characters or symbols and a character image. , Or a symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image representing any figure. Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. The decorative design is not limited to eight types, but may be any number (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, until the finalized decorative symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, 50R for "left", "middle" and "right" For example, when the scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow sequentially from the top to the bottom from the one with the highest symbol number to the next, and the decorative symbol with the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, A decorative symbol whose symbol number is the smallest (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the large symbol number to the one with the small symbol number. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed subsequently.

  In the display area of the image display device 50, a start winning storage display area 50H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 50H, a holding storage display for specifying the number of holdings of variable display (number of special drawing holding memories) corresponding to the special drawing game is performed. Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 60A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 60B, with the variable display corresponding to the special view game being held. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although a start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special view game or variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. When the start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the like, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is satisfied. Is done.

  Under the game area in the game board 20, a normal winning ball device 60A and a normal variable winning ball device 60B are provided. The regular winning ball device 60A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 60B is an electric tulip type character (commonly electric character) having a pair of movable wing pieces that changes to a normal open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilting position by a solenoid (not shown). To form a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 60B, the game ball passes through (enters) the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid for the normal motor vehicle is off. It will be in a normally open state. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 60B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric character is on. ) It is easy to expand and release. It should be noted that although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 60B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 60B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in a normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 60A or the second starting winning hole formed in the normal variable winning ball device 60B is, for example, a first starting opening switch or 2 detected by the start port switch. Based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the first starting opening switch, a score corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls is added to the current score, and the number of first special image holding memories is predetermined. If the upper limit value (for example, "4") or less, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the second starting opening switch, a point corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, three) of the number of winning balls is added to the current score, and the second special view reserve memory number is a predetermined number If the upper limit value (for example, "4") or less, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of points given based on the detection of gaming balls by the first start opening switch and the number of points given based on the detection of gaming balls by the second start opening switch are the same as each other. It may be different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 70 is provided below the normal winning ball device 60A and the normal variable winning ball device 60B. The special variable winning ball device 70 includes a large winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid (not shown) for the large winning opening door, and the large winning combination as a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form a mouth. A point corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, 15) of winning balls is added to the current point based on the detection of the playing balls by the big winning opening switch for detecting the winning of the playing balls to the big winning openings Ru. Usually, the points awarded based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening are set higher than the points awarded based on the winning on the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening.

  In order to play a game with the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, first, a point card consisting of an IC card is inserted into a card insertion slot 28 provided on the side of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B. This point card can be purchased, for example, by a card vending machine installed in the game arcade. In the point card issued from the card vending machine, a game hall code capable of specifying the game arcade in which the card is issued, identification information capable of specifying the point card among a plurality of point cards, and points The card balance etc. whose upper limit is determined according to the amount of money paid by the player at the time of card purchase are recorded.

  When a point card is inserted into the card insertion slot 28 and the ball lending switch is pressed, a predetermined number of points are awarded to the player in exchange for debiting the predetermined number of card balances from the point card's card balance. . When the operation handle is operated in the state where there are points, the batting balls (game media) enclosed in the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B are struck into the gaming area one by one by the striking hammer not shown. The impacted balls that have been driven in are detected one by one by a not-shown launch ball detector, and the point is updated by subtracting 1 each time it is detected.

  The batting balls which are too weak to reach the game area are collected from the ball entrance and detected by a not-shown ball detection device provided on the back of the game board. Each time a foul ball is detected, one point is added and updated. As a result, it is possible to effectively use the subtraction-updated points without obtaining an opportunity for the player's batting balls to reach the game area.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B, the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 is performed such that the game ball having passed through the pass gate 26 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch (not shown). After the popular drawing start condition is established, the common symbol display 20 is updated by the normal symbol display 20, based on the fact that the common drawing start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is established, for example, the previous common drawing game is over. The figure game is started.

  In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time as the common-pattern fluctuation time elapses, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", the variable display result of the normal symbol is "general symbol lost" Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning prize ball device 60B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  For example, after the first start condition is established by the fact that the game ball passing (enter) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 60A is detected by the first start opening switch (not shown), etc. A special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 40A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the end of the figure game or the big hit gaming state. In addition, for example, after the second start condition is satisfied, for example, the game ball passing through (enter) the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 60B is detected by the second start port switch (not shown), etc. A special drawing game by the second special symbol display device 40B is started based on the establishment of the second start condition due to the previous special drawing game or the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 40A or the second special symbol display device 40B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable as the special figure fluctuation time set every time the special figure game is played When the display time has elapsed, a finalized special symbol (special symbol display result) as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as a final symbol as a final symbol, it will be a "loss".

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state. In the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 70 is controlled to be opened a predetermined number of times (the determined number of rounds), so that winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening becomes possible. That is, the opportunity to increase points is provided. However, in a small hit or a big hit of a predetermined type (for example, the latent probability change big hit mentioned above), the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and it is practically impossible to expect winning in the big winning opening. It has become.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, 50R provided in the image display device 50, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 40A Among the special drawing games using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 40B, variable display of the decorative design is started in response to the start of one of the special drawing games. Then, a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol in each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, 50R. Then, the display operation in the image display device 50, the voice output operation by the speakers 80L and 80R, the game effect lamp in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the predetermined reach state or in the reach state. By the lighting operation (flashing operation) of the light emitter such as 90, a rendering operation different from that before reaching the reach state is executed.

  When ending the game, the player presses the settlement switch. As a result, the playable points (game balls) are recorded on the point card as information after update. In addition, when a prize exchange holding point (presence holding ball) or the like exists in addition to the playable holding point, the information may be recorded on the point holding card.

  In addition, when the premium exchange holding point acquired in the previous game is already recorded on the point card, the premium exchange holding point is added and updated. In the above, in addition to the card balance, game playable points (game balls) and prize exchange points (premium points) are recorded in the point card, respectively. The point card on which the rewriting of the information is completed is discharged from the card insertion slot 28.

  In the above-mentioned enclosed type pachinko machine 2B, a game is played by points. Therefore, it is preferable to perform a possessing ball special display indicating the number of possessed balls of the player based on the player's points. In this case, the possession ball special display can be displayed, for example, on the display unit 60 provided at the lower part of the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B.

More specifically, points are reduced as needed by subtracting a point each time a launch ball is detected by the launch ball detector and adding a point every time a fall ball is detected by a foul ball detector. Update. In addition, as described above, when the game ball wins in the winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, or another general winning opening), it corresponds to the winning in the winning opening The score is updated as needed by adding it to the score. Then, the number of possession balls is determined based on the current points, threshold determination is performed on the determined number of possession balls, and display / non-display of predetermined images (first predetermined image and second predetermined image) is controlled.
Instead of this, the threshold for the points is defined, and the threshold determination for the points is performed to display / hide the predetermined image (the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image) indicating the player's points May be performed.

  The pachinko ball that has flowed into the counting and dispensing unit 380 is detected by the counting sensor in the possessed ball number (the number of balls possessed) counted by the inter-table counting unit 5 of the third embodiment and the card unit 3 of the fourth embodiment. And a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is output from the counting and dispensing unit 380 to the control unit 505 and the control unit 305 in response to the detection of the pachinko ball of one ball, and the control unit 505 and the control unit 305 store it accordingly. An example was described in which the number of possessed balls (number of balls held) increases by one. That is, based on the fact that one pachinko ball is detected, an example in which the number of possessed balls (the number of held balls) immediately increases by 1 has been described.

  However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and based on the fact that one pachinko ball is detected, the "counting ball number" is temporarily updated without updating the possessed ball number (number of balls held) (1 Increased), (1) “number of counting spheres” did not increase within a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds), and (2) increase number of “counting sphere number” within a predetermined period became smaller than a predetermined value Based on predetermined conditions such as (3) or that the rate of increase of the "number of counting spheres" within a predetermined period has become smaller than a predetermined rate, the "counting sphere number" ) May be added.

  For example, in the case of a big hit gaming state, the "counting ball number" increases within a predetermined period, so during the big hit gaming state (during a round), the holding ball number (ball number held) does not increase, "counting ball number" It increases to the number (for example, 1000-2000) according to the jackpot type (period controlled to the jackpot gaming state). Then, at the timing after the big hit gaming state ends and the payout of the winning balls based on the winning to the big winning opening is finished, the “counting ball number” is added to the possessed ball number (ball holding number) Become. In this case, the number of possessed balls (number of balls possessed) changes rapidly, but the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are appropriately displayed by the possessed ball special display control process of FIG. 32 described above. be able to.

  In addition, although it is different from the possession ball number special indication, when making the above-mentioned enclosed type pachinko machine 2B into the game machine which relates to this invention, ID of serial number to all enclosed type pachinko machines 2B installed in the store of the wide area It is possible to construct a gaming system in which a predetermined management device (for example, hall computer 6 installed in each store) manages and totals game information of all enclosed type pachinko machines 2B installed in each store. It is. Here, the “wide area” may be, for example, a predetermined area (for example, an area classified by prefecture), or may be the whole country. In this case, the hall computer 6 installed in one store causes the data display device 4 installed in the own store to display information related to the game played in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B installed in the other store. It is possible to construct a good gaming system.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the fifth gaming system 1C in this case. The same components as those of the third gaming system 1A and the fourth gaming system 1B described in the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will not be repeated.
The fifth gaming system 1C is configured to include a plurality of enclosed pachinko machines 2B, a data display device 4 provided corresponding to each enclosed pachinko machine 2B, and a hall computer 6 for each of a plurality of stores. The hole type pachinko machine 2B and the data display device 4 are connected to the hall computer 6 through the table terminal. The hall computer 6 of each store is connected via the network N such as the Internet, and is configured to be able to mutually transmit and receive information related to the game in the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B.

  In the present embodiment, the hall computer 6 includes a communication unit for communicating with the hall computers 6 of other stores. The CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 transmits, to the hall computer 6 of another shop, the own-room game aggregation data obtained by totaling the game results of the respective enclosed pachinko machines 2B installed in the own shop. In addition, the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 transmits, from the hall computer 6 installed in another shop, the other-store game aggregation data obtained by aggregating the game results of the respective enclosed type pachinko machines 2B installed in the other shop via the communication unit. To receive. The own-store game aggregation data and the other-store gaming aggregation data are stored, for example, in the form of a database in the hard disk 680.

  The CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 sets the game aggregation data of the model of the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B of its own store and other stores to the enclosed type pachinko of the corresponding model at a predetermined timing (for example, timing every time a predetermined time elapses). It transmits to the data display apparatus 4 provided corresponding to the apparatus 2B. Then, based on the game aggregation data received from the hall computer 6, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 uses the second display unit 440 with information related to the game in the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B of the own store and other stores. Control to display.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 in this case.
In the second display section 440, for the "pachinko XXX" which is a model of the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B, the average number of times of our shop big hit which is the average number of big hits of its own store and the average number of big hits of another store A It is displayed. In addition, since the number of big hit averages of the own store was more than the A store, the message "the number of big hits of the store is large !!" is displayed. By performing such a display, in addition to the number of big hits of the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B of the store, the surrounding gaming customers can know the number of big hits of the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B of another store, in which store It can be understood if it is advantageous to play a game.

  Next, regarding the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to use a slot machine as a gaming machine in place of the pachinko machine 2. When the gaming machine is a slot machine, the possessed medal special display control process similar to the possessed ball special display control process described in the above embodiment is performed according to the possessed medal number of the player, and Control may be performed to display / non-display the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image according to the request.

  As described in the third embodiment, if the predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the data display device 4, the inter-plate counting unit 5 causes the data display device 4 to have a possessed medal number signal indicating the possessed medal number of the player. The processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 specifies the number of possessed medals of the player based on the possessed number of medals signal output from the inter-base counting unit 5, and performs display control of a predetermined image, Non-display control may be performed.

  Further, as described in the fourth embodiment, if a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the card unit 3, the player is determined based on the counting result of the possessed medal number by the counting payout unit 380 provided in the card unit 3. The number of possessed medals may be determined, and display control and non-display control of a predetermined image may be performed.

  In this case, the first predetermined image can be a dollar box for medals into which the medals obtained by the player are inserted, or a bulk of the medals stacked on one box. Further, the second predetermined image may be a special box for medals into which medals obtained by the player are inserted, or may be a bulk of medals stacked on another box.

  Further, the first display threshold (first value) for displaying the first predetermined image and the first non-display threshold (second value) for hiding the first predetermined image are within a predetermined time range. It can be determined based on the number of possessed medals decreasing in the inside. Specifically, assuming that the number of medals to be paid back to the player by one repayment operation is 50, for example, the first display threshold and the first non-display 75 are obtained by giving an allowance of 25 sheets to 50 sheets. The difference with the threshold value (first predetermined number). Then, for example, the first display threshold is set to 200 and the first non-display threshold is set to 125.

  In addition, the second display threshold is larger than the first display threshold, and the difference between the second display threshold and the second non-display threshold (second predetermined number) is larger than the first predetermined number. The display threshold and the second non-display threshold are set in advance. For example, the second predetermined number is 150, the second display threshold is 1000, and the second non-display threshold is 850.

  Further, when the gaming machine is a slot machine, the display contents of the first display section 430 of the data display device 4 include the model name of the slot machine and the number of times of start, the number of times of generating bonus (number of generating RB, number of generating BB), The information such as the number of benefits provided (the number of ART occurrences and the number of RT occurrences) and the start history graph may be defined. In addition, as the display content of the second display unit 440, information such as vacant platform information, bonus in-progress information, benefit in-progress information, and the like may be defined. Moreover, the display content regarding a specific effect (simultaneous effect) can also be defined similarly to said embodiment.

  Further, the signal capable of specifying the number of possessed game media transmitted from inter-plate counting unit 5 to data display device 4 is a possessed ball signal indicating the possessed ball of the player or the possessed number of medals indicating the number of possessed medals of the player. It is not limited to the signal. Instead of these signals, a signal indicating the increase or decrease in number of game media (pachinko balls or medals) (hereinafter referred to as "game media increase / decrease number signal") may be transmitted to the data display device 4. In this case, the data display device 4 determines the number of possessed gaming media by updating the number of possession balls and the number of possessed medals of the player based on the gaming media increase / decrease number signal transmitted from the inter-base counting unit 5 Just do it.

  Further, the timing for outputting the signal capable of specifying the number of owned gaming media is the timing at each predetermined time interval, the timing when the count result of the count withdrawal unit 380 reaches a predetermined number, the count by the count withdrawal unit 380 If a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since there is no time, counting is determined, and intermittent timing such as timing at which the determination is waited may be performed, and design change can be made as appropriate at which timing to output a signal. .

  Further, a predetermined image (first predetermined image, second predetermined image) is displayed on the display unit (the first display unit 430 and / or the second display unit 440) of the data display device 4 and the display unit 340 of the card unit 3. Instead of this, a display unit may be configured on the front face of each counter provided in the lower part of the pachinko machine 2 corresponding to each pachinko machine 2, and a predetermined image may be displayed on the display unit.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the display unit provided in each counter 7 in this case. At the lower part of the pachinko machine 2, each car counter 7 is provided, and it is configured to be able to count pachinko balls discharged from the lower tray 24 of the pachinko machine 2. A display unit 740 is provided on the front of each counter 7. The control unit of each counter 7 carries out the same special ball display control process (see FIG. 32) as the above embodiment. Control is performed to cause the display unit 730 to display the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the information display device according to the present invention has been described as the data display device 4, but it goes without saying that the information display device is not limited to this. Instead of the data display 4, it is also possible to use a conventional call lamp 9 as an information display.

  In the above embodiment, the touch panel 421 is provided on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 and the player taps the screen with his finger to call the store clerk or select a menu. However, instead of the touch panel 421, a call button or menu selection button may be provided on the housing, and the player may call a store clerk or select a menu by pressing the call button or menu selection button.

  In the above embodiment, the second display unit 440 is provided on the left and right sides of the first display unit 430. However, the second display unit 440 may be provided on only one of the left and right sides. . In addition, the second display portion 440 may be provided on the side surface of the base portion 4A instead of protruding from the base portion 4A to the passage side. Also in this case, the second display unit 440 may be provided on both the left and right side surfaces, or the second display unit 440 may be provided on only one of the left and right side surfaces.

  In the above embodiment, the angle of the second display portion 440 is changed relative to the first display portion 430 by rotating the door portion 4B by the hinge portion 4C in the data display device 4. However, it is also possible to adopt a fixed configuration in which the angle of the second display unit 440 does not change relative to the first display unit 430. In this case, the base portion 4A and the sub base portion are arranged such that the member forming the second display portion 440 (hereinafter referred to as "sub base portion") has a predetermined opening angle with respect to the base portion 4A. It may be configured integrally.

  Specifically, the opening angle of a state in which the base portion 4A and the sub base portion overlap is 0 °, and the sub base portion is opened like a door from that state (rotated on the basis of one end of the base portion 4A When the opening angle of the sub-base portion in a state where the sub-base portion is perpendicular to the base portion 4A is defined as 90 °, the installation angle of the sub-base portion is, for example, within an angle range of 60 ° to 90 ° It can be an angle. If it is set as an installation angle included in this angle range, it is not possible to visually recognize the second display section 440 from the gaming position of the player who plays a game with the gaming machine, but the second display section 440 can be viewed.

  In addition to the above, the second display unit 440 may be disposed on the side surface of the main body of the data display device 4 (both the left and right side surfaces or one of the left and right side surfaces). That is, the sub-base portion may be provided on the side surface of the base portion 4A instead of providing the sub-base portion so as to protrude from the base portion 4A toward the passage.

  In the third embodiment described above, it is described that the possession ball special display is displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4, but the possession ball is displayed on the second display unit 440 instead of the first display unit 430. A special display may be displayed.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the display table 681 stored in the hard disk 680 of the hall computer 6 in this case.
Looking at the display table 681, the possession sphere special display is not defined in the display contents of the first display unit 430, and instead, (1) possession sphere special display is displayed on the display contents of the second display portion 440. Is defined.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the second display portion display pattern table 683b stored in the hard disk 680 of the hall computer 6 in this case.
Looking at the second display portion display pattern table 683b, the display aspect of the second display portion 440 is defined as a full screen possession ball special display as "pattern T".

  In this case, the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 may create display setting data 691 based on the above-mentioned table and transmit the setting data 691 to the data display device 4 to set the display of the data display device 4.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the possessed ball special display displayed on the second display unit 440 in this case. FIG. 57 shows an example of a display screen of the possession sphere special display in the case of displaying a dollar box as the first predetermined image and a special box as the second predetermined image. In addition, since the display method of a 1st predetermined image and a 2nd predetermined image is the same as the display method demonstrated by 3rd Embodiment and 4th Embodiment, description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted here.

  In addition, instead of displaying the possession ball special display on any one of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4, both the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 It is also possible to display the possessed ball special display on the display unit of.

  Further, the second display unit 440 does not necessarily have to be a display for displaying information in characters and numbers, and may be an LED lamp for notifying information to a gaming guest by light emission. Specifically, for example, a sub-base portion in which a circular or polygonal (triangular, quadrilateral, hexagonal, etc.) LED lamp is formed is provided on the main body side surface (both left and right side surfaces or one left and right side surface) of data display device 4 Side lamps can be configured. In addition, an LED lamp may be provided so as to protrude from the base portion 4A to the passage side using a bridge. In this case, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 causes the LED lamp to emit information with different emission colors and patterns, such as information such as during a hit or a probability change of the pachinko machine 2, during latent probability change, during a short It should be controlled to

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of the LED light emission table which is a table relating to the setting of light emission of the LED lamp in this case. This LED light emission table can be stored in advance in the memory (storage device) of the hall computer 6. Then, the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 sets the light emission of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 based on the LED light emission table.

  In the LED light emission table, the type, the number, and the light emission setting of the LED lamp are stored in association with each other. In the light emission setting of the LED lamp, notification contents, light emission color, and light emission pattern are defined. The notification content is content to notify the game customer by the light emission color and the light emission pattern.

  For example, in "vacant information" indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is a vacant platform, "blue" is defined as a light emission color, and "lighting" is defined as a light emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is an empty board, the lighting control of the LED lamp is performed in blue.

  In the "big hit information" indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is hitting a big hit, "red" is defined as a light emitting color, and "flashing at a time interval of α seconds" is defined as a light emitting pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is a vacant platform, the LED lamp is controlled to blink in red.

  In "latency probability change information" indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in the latent probability change, "green" is defined as a light emission color and "flashing at a time interval of β seconds" is defined as a light emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is in a state of latent change, the lighting of the LED lamp is controlled to be green.

  In the "latency probability change information" indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in a latency state, "yellow" is defined as a light emission color, and "flashing at a time interval of γ seconds" is defined as a light emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is short, the LED lamp is controlled to turn yellow.

  In addition, the correspondence of the alerting | reporting content which concerns on the light emission setting of said LED lamp, light emission color, and a light emission pattern is only an example, and design change is possible suitably. It is possible to appropriately set the time intervals of the blinking of the LED lamp (for example, the above α seconds, β seconds, and γ seconds). Further, instead of causing the LED lamp to emit light in a fixed light emission color, information may be transmitted to surrounding game customers by illumination combining various light emission colors.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the control device according to the present invention has been described as the hall computer 6, but it goes without saying that the control device is not limited to the hall computer 6. A base terminal installed for each gaming island may be used as a control device, or a relay computer for relaying the base terminal and the hall computer 6 may be installed, and this relay computer may be used as a control device. Further, the ball management computer 8 described in the fourth embodiment may be used as a control device according to the present invention.

  In addition, the ball management computer 8 does not manage member data, but a member management computer for managing a member card separately from the hall computer 6 and the ball management computer 8 is installed in the store, and the member management is performed. A computer may be used as a control device according to the present invention.

  In addition, a computer having two or three functions of the hall computer 6, the ball management computer 8, and the member management computer may be used as the control device according to the present invention. That is, (1) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the ball management computer 8, (2) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the membership management computer, (3) the ball management computer 8 and the membership management computer The control device according to the present invention may be any one of a computer having the functions of (4) and a computer having the functions of the ball computer 6 and the ball management computer 8 and the member management computer.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, although the plastic lid P was illustrated as a covering which covers the 2nd display part 440 of the data display apparatus 4, a covering is not necessarily restricted to this. If a cover is used as the lid, it is not limited to the plastic lid P, and may be a glass lid or a wooden lid. In addition, as a covering other than the lid, a casing surrounding the second display portion 440 may be used as the covering according to the present invention. The housing can be, for example, a colored plastic, vinyl or wooden housing.

FIG. 59 is a view showing an example of the case in this case.
In the door 4B in which the 2nd display part 440 was formed, the housing 445 is comprised so that attachment or detachment is possible so that the whole may be enclosed. Specifically, a housing 445 formed in a U-shape in a front view is configured to be attachable to the door portion 4B so as to surround a surface of the door portion 4B other than the adhesive surface of the hinge portion 4C. By attaching such a chassis 445 to the door 4B, it is possible to create a state in which the second display unit 440 can not be further visually recognized by the player playing a game in the gaming machine.

  The housing 445 may have a bottomed structure provided with a bottom surrounding the inner surface of the door 4B, or may have a bottomless structure not provided with a bottom. When the bottomed structure is adopted, the inner surface of the door 4B is also surrounded by the housing 445. Therefore, even the inner surface of the door 4B can not be viewed by the player, as if the player were Can create a situation as if it were isolated.

  In addition, the above-described cover does not necessarily have to cover the entire second display unit 440, and may cover a part of the second display unit 440. For example, the cover may cover only the central portion of the second display 440, or may cover the right half, the left half, the upper half, and the lower half of the second display 440. In addition, a cover covering the periphery of the second display unit 440 may be used.

  Further, information according to the type of pachinko machine 2 is displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4, and information not related to the type of pachinko machine 2 is displayed on the second display unit 440. It is also good. The information not depending on the type of the pachinko machine 2 includes information that does not directly depend on the specs of the pachinko machine 2, such as a big hit, a definite change, a vacant table, a rotation speed, and a winning number. The first display unit 430 is controlled to display information depending on the type of the pachinko machine 2 such as latent probability change information, short time information, exact information, small hit information, etc. It is preferable to control to display information that does not directly depend on the specifications of the pachinko machine, such as the number of rotations, the number of winnings, etc., during the conviction, in the vacant platform, etc.

  In the above embodiment, when the data display device 4 receives the simultaneous effect display instruction signal from the hall computer 6, the simultaneous effect display is performed. However, simultaneous effect display may be performed based on the clocked time of the clock unit 455 included in the data display device 4. In this case, the RTC 235, which is a clock unit included in the pachinko machine 2, and the clock unit 455 may be synchronized to perform simultaneous effect display at the same timing as the pachinko machine 2 performs simultaneous effect.

  In the big hit running production, the hall computer 6 is described as performing the big hit running production by transmitting the display instruction signal for the big hit running production to each data display device 4 with a delay for a predetermined delay time. However, the configuration for realizing the big hit running effect is not limited to this.

  For example, the data display devices 4 may be connected to each other using a predetermined communication cable, and the big hit running effect execution signal may be mutually transmitted using the communication cable. In this case, when the data display device 4 receives the big hit running effect execution signal from the adjacent data display device 4, the data display device 4 shifts the time by a predetermined time difference to display the big hit running image, and causes the next data display device 4 to be displayed. A big hit running production execution signal may be transmitted. That is, the jackpot running presentation can be realized by sequentially transmitting the jackpot running presentation execution signal in ascending or descending order according to the identification number of the data display device 4.

[6. Sixth embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment, the data display device 4 according to the third embodiment is replaced with an information display device 1400. As shown in FIG. 68A, the information display device 1400 includes a first display unit 1410 and a second display unit 1420.

  At least game data is displayed on the first display unit 1410 as in the case of the data display device 4 (see FIG. 35), and the game data to be displayed differs depending on the type of the game machine provided correspondingly.

  Specifically, when the information display device 1400 is provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the number of big hits generated by the pachinko machine 2 in the "big hit" display window is The number of variable displays from the big hit end is displayed as the start number in the "start" display window, and the number of probability variation big hits that are generated is displayed in the "certain" display window, and the generated normal in the "normal" display window The number of big hits is displayed, and the possession ball special display is displayed on the "dollar box" display window. Here, “probable change” is a state in which the jackpot probability has increased, and in this example, the positive change continues for a predetermined number of variable display times (for example, 100 times). The positive change may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  On the other hand, when the information display device 1400 is provided corresponding to the slot machine, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the number of big bonus generated in the slot machine is displayed in the "BB" display window, The number of ARTs generated is displayed in the "ART" display window, the number of games from the end of the big bonus is displayed in the "number of games" display window, and the possessed medal special display is displayed in the "dollar box" display window . Here, “ART (Assist Replay Time)” is a state in which the small winning combination is assisted (the push order and the color to be aligned are notified) and the replay probability is increased, and in this example, the predetermined number of games The ART continues for (for example, 100 games).

  In the first display unit 1410 of the information display device 1400, the player taps the call icon, the menu icon, and the version information icon to be displayed in the same manner as the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4. It is configured to be able to perform a call, menu selection (wagon service, towel, meal break, etc.), and display of version information of the gaming machine.

  The second display portion 1420 displays advantageous data which is game data in an advantageous state advantageous to the player for the corresponding game machine, and the game data displayed differs depending on the type of the game machine provided correspondingly. . Specifically, when the information display device 1400 is provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), “probable The remaining fluctuation count of is displayed as "after ○ times". On the other hand, when the information display device 1400 is provided corresponding to the slot machine, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), “the number of remaining games of ART” which is the number of remaining games that ART continues during ART. Is displayed as “After ○ game”, and the number of medals obtained by the player during the ART is displayed as “O acquisition”. The number of medals acquired may be the number of payouts, or may be the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of insertions from the number of payouts.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b), the information display device 1400 is attached to the curtain plate M of the gaming island as follows. First, on the upper side of the gaming machine, the opposite L-shaped rails R are fixed to the curtain M. A groove is provided in the horizontal direction in the portion to which the rail R of this curtain M is attached. Next, the first display portion 1410 is fixed to the curtain M on the upper side of the rail R. Therefore, the first display unit 1410 can not move. From the lower portion of the back surface of the second display portion 1420, the base 142 is a wide portion 1421a at the base end side and a support member 1421 of a narrow portion 1421b at the tip end protrudes, and the wide portion 1421a is fitted to the rail R The second display unit 1420 is attached by penetrating the groove of the curtain M.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (c), a pair of pulleys 1422 and 1422 are provided behind the curtain M at the approximate left end and the approximate center of the rail R, and the pulleys 1422 and 1422 have a belt. 1423 is wound around, and the tip end side of the support member 1421 is fixed to the belt 1423. Therefore, when one of the pulleys 1422 is rotated by a motor (not shown), the belt 1423 wound around the pulleys 1422 and 1422 is driven to move the supporting member 1421 fixed to the belt 1423, A second display unit 1420 is horizontally movable along the rail R in front of the first display unit 1410.

  The second display unit 1420 moves to a predetermined position under the control of a CPU that functions as movement processing means based on predetermined information indicating that the gaming machine is in an advantageous state is input to the information display device 1400. Be done. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of the second display portion moving process performed by the CPU of the information display device 1400, where (a) is an embodiment and (b) is a modified example.

  First, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 69A, the CPU waits for input of predetermined information (L101). Here, the predetermined information is a signal indicating that the gaming machine is in the advantageous state, and if the gaming machine is the pachinko machine 2, the predetermined information is output based on the fact that the pachinko machine 2 is in the definite changing state. If the gaming machine is a slot machine, it is an ART signal that is output based on the fact that the slot machine is in an ART state. The signal during the advantageous state may be output continuously during the advantageous state, or may be pulsed output at the beginning and the end of the advantageous state. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 73, the signal in the advantageous state also includes an intermittent advantageous state signal which is continuously output in the advantageous state but is temporarily put in the non-output state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Will be described later.

  When it is determined that the predetermined information is input (YES) in L101, the second display unit 1420 is driven from the initial position (for example, the left end of the first display unit 1410) by driving the motor. It moves to the center of the first display unit 1410) (L102), and waits for the end of the input of the predetermined information (L103). When it is determined that the input of the predetermined information is completed in L103 (YES), the second display unit 1420 is moved from the predetermined position to the initial position by driving the motor (L104), and the second display is performed. End the copy process.

  Here, the CPU that performs the process of L102 sets the second display unit 1420 to a predetermined position based on the fact that predetermined information (a positive change signal, an ART signal) indicating that it is in the advantageous state is input to the information display device 1400. It functions as movement processing means for performing processing for movement. According to this, since the second display unit 1420 that displays the advantageous data is moved to the predetermined position in the advantageous state, the information can be highlighted and displayed in the advantageous state.

  Further, in the modified example of FIG. 69 (b), the CPU determines whether the difference number of the predetermined period is within the predetermined range (L101 '). Here, the predetermined period is, for example, one minute. In the case of a pachinko machine 2, the difference number is the number of slipper balls between the number of inserted balls based on the strike signal and the number of dispensed balls based on the discharge signal. It is the number of medals which is the difference from the number of medals paid out based on the signal. The predetermined range is, for example, ± 30 or less in the case of the pachinko machine 2. Generally, if the number of slips exceeds +30, it is a big hit, if it is within ± 30, it is a positive change, and if it is less than −30, it is a normal state. The numerical values in the predetermined range are not limited to this example. In addition, the predetermined range sets a numerical value that can identify that the slot machine is in the ART state.

  When it is determined in L101 ′ that the difference number in the predetermined period is within the predetermined range (YES), the second display unit 1420 is moved to the initial position (for example, the left end of the first display unit 1410) by driving the motor. ) To a predetermined position (for example, the center of the first display unit 1410) (L102), and waits for the number of external differences to fall outside the predetermined range (L103 '). When it is determined that the difference number is out of the predetermined range (YES) in L103 ′, the second display unit 1420 is moved from the predetermined position to the initial position by driving the motor (L104). , 2nd display part movement processing is ended.

  Here, the CPU performing the processing of L101 'is a game result signal indicating the result of the game output from the gaming machine (in the case of a pachinko machine, a strike signal and a payout signal, and in the slot machine, a medal insertion signal and a medal payout Functions as a determination unit that determines whether or not an advantageous state (a positive variation state, an ART state) is based on the input of the signal), and the CPU performing the processing of L102 is in an advantageous state by the determination unit Functions as a movement processing unit that moves the second display unit 1420 to a predetermined position based on the determination made in the above. According to this, even if the gaming machine does not output signals during the advantageous state (probability change signal, ART signal), it is possible to perform the process of moving the second display unit 1420 to the predetermined position. In addition, even if the predetermined information is not output from the gaming machine, the process of moving the second display portion 1420 to the predetermined position can be performed.

  In the embodiment, when the gaming machine is in the advantageous state, the signal during the advantageous state is input and the second display portion 1420 is immediately moved, while in the modification, the gaming result signal even if the gaming machine is in the advantageous state Although the second display unit 1420 is moved as soon as a predetermined period has elapsed since the input of the command, the information can be emphasized and displayed in an advantageous state.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example in which the information display device 1400 is provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2. As shown in FIG. 70, if there is an input of a positive variation signal from the initial state of (a) (YES at L101), as shown in (b), the second display portion 1420 is predetermined from the initial position (left end). Move to the position (center) (L102).

  Here, on the second display unit 1420, the number of remaining fluctuation of the probability change is displayed as “after ○ times”. The CPU performing the process of displaying the number of remaining fluctuations of the probability change on the second display unit 1420 is in the gain state (during the probability change state) based on the fact that the signal (probability change signal) is input to the information display device 1400. Functions as a game number display processing means for performing processing of displaying a display based on the number of games to be executed on the second display unit as advantage data. According to this, it is possible to highlight and display information on the number of games executed during the advantageous state.

  Then, when the input of the probability change signal is finished (YES in L103), as shown in (c), the second display portion 1420 moves from the predetermined position to the initial position (L104), and the remaining variable display in which the probability change continues. The display of the number disappears.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example in which the information display device 1400 is provided corresponding to the slot machine. As shown in FIG. 71, when an ART signal is input from the initial state of (a) (YES in L101), as shown in (b), the second display portion 1420 is predetermined from the initial position (left end) Move to the position (center) (L102).

  Here, on the second display portion 1420, the number of remaining ART games is displayed as "After ○ game", and the number of medals obtained by the player during this ART is displayed as "O pieces". The CPU performing the process of displaying the number of remaining ART games on the second display unit 1420 is in the advantageous state (in the ART state) based on the fact that the advantageous state signal (ART signal) is input to the information display device 1400. Functions as a game number display processing means for performing processing of displaying a display based on the number of games to be executed on the second display unit as advantage data. According to this, it is possible to highlight and display information on the number of games executed during the advantageous state. In addition, the CPU performing processing for displaying the number of medals obtained by the player during ART on the second display unit 1420 is advantageous based on the fact that the signal during advantageous state (ART signal) is input to the information display device 1400. It functions as a game value display processing means for performing a process of displaying a display based on the game value given during the state (in the ART state) as advantage data on the second display unit. According to this, it is possible to highlight and display information on the gaming value given during the advantageous state.

  Then, when the input of the probability change signal is finished (YES in L103), as shown in (c), the second display portion 1420 moves from the predetermined position to the initial position (L104), and the number of remaining games continued by the ART. And the display of the number of medals won by the player during ART disappears.

  In this example, in FIGS. 70 and 71, when the second display unit 1420 is in the initial position (left end), an example in which the game data is not displayed on the second display unit 1420 has been described. Also, even when the second display unit 1420 is in the initial position, some game data may be displayed on the second display unit 1420. For example, the first display unit hidden by the second display unit 1420 The display contents of 1410 may be displayed.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a modification of the information display device 1400, in which (a) is an example in which the second display moves to a position not overlapping the first display, (b) shows the second display moves. This is an example in which the first display unit moves without being moved.

  In the above-mentioned FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, although the example in which the predetermined position at which the second display portion 1420 moves is the position overlapping the first display portion 1410 (the center of the first display portion 1410) has been described, The predetermined position may be a position not overlapping the first display unit 1410, and may be outside (for example, the left side of) the first display unit 1410 as shown in FIG. 72 (a), for example. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68, the support 1421 is not provided only immediately after the second display portion 1420, but as shown in the plan view of FIG. 72 (a '), the support 1421 is not provided. The second display portion 1420 can be protruded to the left side of the first display portion 1410 by extending the second display portion 1420 to the right side. According to this, it is possible to highlight and display information in the advantageous state, and to display at a position different from the first display unit 1410.

  In addition, the information display device 1400 moves the first display unit 1410 or the second display unit 1420 to a position away from the gaming machine based on the fact that a specific signal output from the gaming machine is input to the information display device 1400. Do the process of For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), in the pachinko machine 2 provided with the accessory storage unit Y1 on the upper side, the accessory Y protrudes from the accessory storage unit Y1 to information, and the accessory movable signal which is a specific signal When input from the pachinko machine 2 to the information display device 1400, the first display unit 1410 is moved upward. Here, unlike the structure described with reference to FIG. 68, the first display unit 1410 is configured to be movable with respect to the curtain M. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display of the first display unit 1410 or the second display unit 1420 from being obscured by the accessory Y projecting from the gaming machine. In addition, as long as the character Y can be avoided, the first display unit 1410 may move not in the upper side but in the right and left or in the front and back. In addition, the second display unit 1420 may move instead of the first display unit 1410.

  When the first display unit 1410 moves, the call icon also moves to make it difficult to operate. Therefore, instead of displaying the call icon on the first display unit 1410, the call button is displayed separately from the first display unit 1410. The call button may be provided so that the call button does not move.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example in the case where a signal is input during an intermittent advantageous state in the information display device 1400. In the sixth embodiment described above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 2 or slot machine) describes an example in which the signal (probability change signal or ART signal) is output continuously during the advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The advantageous state in progress signal is an intermittent advantageous state in progress signal which is temporarily put into a non-output state in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, every 100 acquisitions in ART, every ART 100 games, every 20 winnings of a specific combination) It is also good. Then, the information display device 1400 adds the number of times of establishment of the predetermined condition (the number of times of consecutive channing) based on the signal during the intermittent advantageous state being input, and the number of times of establishment is the second display unit as the advantageous data. A process to display on 1420 is performed. In this example, the ART signal, which is a signal in the advantageous state, is intermittently switched from HIGH to LOW every 100 acquisitions in the ART, and the CPU of the information display device 1400 performs continuous operation when the ART signal is switched to LOW. The number of times of channing is added, and the number of times of consecutive channing is displayed on the second display unit 1420. According to this, it is possible to specify the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As described in L103 and L104 in FIG. 69, when the input of the predetermined information is completed, the second display portion 1420 is moved to the initial position, but as in the intermittent advantageous state signal shown in FIG. When the information is in a non-output state for a short time, the second display unit 1420 is not moved to the initial position and remains at the predetermined position. In this case, in L103, the process may proceed to L104 only when it is determined that a predetermined period (more than the period of being intermittently LOW) has elapsed after the input of the predetermined information is completed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the movement of the second display portion 1420 from the initial position to the predetermined position may move at once, or may move through a plurality of steps. In addition, an information display device 1400 and a gaming device (such as a ball lending unit 120, a card unit 3, a stand unit 5 or a medal lending machine), an information display device 1400 and a management device (a hall computer or a ball management computer). Etc.), and a signal (a moving direction, the number of steps, etc.) for moving the second display unit 1420 is output from the gaming apparatus or the management apparatus, and the information display apparatus 1400 receives the signal. The unit 1420 may move.

  The function of the information display device 1400 according to the sixth embodiment described above (that is, having a first display portion 1410 capable of displaying at least game data, and a second display portion 1420 capable of displaying advantage data, and predetermined When the information is input, the second display unit 1420 is moved to a predetermined position) not only the data display device 4 according to the third embodiment but also the display 124 of the ball lending unit 120 according to the first and second embodiments. The present invention is also applicable to the display unit 340 of the card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment. In the display 124 and the display unit 340, as described above, the first number of display units obtained by converting the first ownership value before conversion in a predetermined display unit and the second ownership value after conversion are predetermined. Since the second display unit number converted in display units is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize how much the game is possible based on the ownership value of the other loan rate after conversion.

[7. Modified example]
Finally, a modification of the present invention will be described.

  In the above embodiment, although an example in which the gaming machine is the pachinko machine 110 or the pachinko machine 2 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine, and in this case, medals of one loan rate The number and the number of possessed medals will be converted to other loan rates. If a pachinko machine and a slot machine coexist as gaming machines, convert the number of balls (the number of stored balls or the number of balls possessed) into the number of medals (the number of stored medals or the number of possessed medals). The number may be converted into the number of balls. Also, the gaming machine may be an enclosed type pachinko machine, in which case the score of one loan rate will be converted to another loan rate.

  In the above embodiment, the management device for managing the ownership value may be a member management device or a ball management computer, and the management device is provided in the game arcade to manage only the store. It may be provided outside the game arcade to manage a plurality of stores.

  In the above embodiment, the conversion can be performed only when it is possible (online) to communicate with the member management device 162 that manages the number of balls or the ball-management computer 8 and can not be performed if the communication is not possible (offline) It is preferable to

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the gaming apparatus for conversion is the ball lending unit 120 or the card unit 3 has been described, but the gaming apparatus may be, for example, a POS terminal for performing prize exchange processing, and this POS terminal Then, the card may be accepted, the number of balls specified from the record information of the card may be converted into one rate (for example, the lowest rate), the sum value may be displayed, and the prize exchange process may be performed. At that time, it may be possible to display a gift which can be exchanged with the converted number of balls.

  Further, the gaming apparatus which performs conversion may be a portable terminal possessed by a salesperson who carries out a wagon service in the game arcade, and the portable terminal accepts a card and determines the number of balls specified from the record information of the card. It may be converted to a rate of to make it possible to purchase an article for sale.

  In the fourth embodiment described above, an example in which conversion is possible for both the membership card and the visitor card has been described, but conversion may be made for the membership card but conversion may not be possible for the visitor card. .

  Although the above embodiment has described an example in which conversion is possible in any of the ball lending units 120, whether or not conversion is possible may be set for each of the ball lending units 120, and the setting may be set individually by the remote control Or, it may be carried out by collective setting from the member management device 162.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, ball total processing and conversion shown in H7 of FIG. 37 are performed in combination (that is, one player's card and another player's card are received, ball total processing and conversion) And the ball division process and conversion shown in the same H15 (ie, the card of one player and the card of another player are received, and the ball division process and Conversion) may be performed.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, an example is described in which the advantageous state is the probability change state in the pachinko machine 2 or the ART state in the slot machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be a time saving state, a big bonus state in a slot machine, or a regular bonus state.

[8. Other inventions]
Finally, other inventions included in the present application will be described.

[8-1. First invention]
Conventionally, as shown in prior art document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-005655), it is provided corresponding to a gaming machine, and provided with each counter, and the number of balls counted by the each counter. A gaming device for paying out gaming media within a range, wherein the number of balls having the same rate as the lending rate (for example, 4 yen) of gaming media in the gaming device satisfies a predetermined number of payouts (for example, 125) It is known to perform processing (so-called entry) in which the number of balls possessed by another rate (for example, 1 yen) is converted into the number of balls possessed by the loan rate, if not.

  However, in the gaming apparatus of the prior art document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to recognize how much the game is possible based on the number of balls of the loan rate after the conversion.

  The first invention is made under such a background, and the purpose is to set the first ownership value corresponding to one loan rate to the second ownership value corresponding to another loan rate. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming apparatus in which it is easy to recognize how much a game is possible based on the possession value of another loan rate after conversion when converting.

First, 1 of the first invention is
Owning value (the number of stored balls) which can be used for playing in the gaming machine (the pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, the slot machine) Ownership value storage means (the ball table of the control unit 122) for storing the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals, for each lending rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the owned value is lent;
Convert a first ownership value (for example, 4 yen number of balls) corresponding to one loan rate stored in the ownership value storage means into a second ownership value (for example, 1 yen balls number) corresponding to the other loan rates Conversion means (the CPU of the control unit 122 which performs the conversion process of S118);
A gaming apparatus (a ball lending unit 120 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and a card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment),
The first display unit number obtained by converting the first ownership value before conversion in a predetermined display unit (2000 balls) and the second ownership value after conversion are converted in the predetermined display unit The gaming apparatus further comprises unit number display means for displaying the second display unit number (S 102 and the CPU of the control unit 122 performing the processing of S 109 or S 115 and the display 124).
According to this, the first number of display units obtained by converting the first ownership value before conversion in a predetermined display unit and the second number of conversions after the conversion are converted in a predetermined display unit Since the number of display units is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize how much the game is possible based on the possession value of the other loan rate after conversion.

Also, 2 of the first invention is
The gaming apparatus described in 1 of the first invention,
The gaming apparatus is further provided with a specific effect executing unit (a CPU of the control unit 122 for performing display during conversion in S118 and the display 124) for executing a specific effect when the conversion by the conversion unit is performed.
According to this, it can be understood that conversion of ownership value is being performed.

The third aspect of the first invention is
The gaming apparatus (card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment) described in 1 or 2 of the first invention,
The gaming machine is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine) capable of playing a game using gaming media (pachinko balls, medals),
When the number of owned game media (the number of owned balls and the number of possessed medals) of the player playing the game on the gaming machine reaches a first value (the first display threshold), the gaming device receives a predetermined image (dollar box, one thousand box) Display control for causing the display means (display section 340) to display the stepwise display of ball bulk, and the number of owned game media has the first value when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means Even if it falls below the first value, the difference between the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value may be a predetermined number more than the first value (for example, 125 balls which is one payout number of pachinko balls, one payout number of medals The predetermined image is not displayed if it has reached a small second value (first non-display threshold) which is 50 sheets or a predetermined set value, and the predetermined image is not displayed if the value is below the second value. Control means (display control board 3) capable of executing non-display control for making the display non-display 9) further comprising a a gaming apparatus according to claim.
According to this, it is possible to realize an intuitively easy-to-understand display indicating the number of gaming media possessed by the player and the gaming state by displaying the predetermined image on the display means based on the number of gaming media possessed. Further, the second value for not displaying the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference between the first value and the second value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being switched frequently due to the increase or decrease of the number of owned gaming media at the threshold.

The fourth aspect of the first invention is
It is a game apparatus described in any one of 1 to 3 of the first invention,
The gaming apparatus is characterized in that the display mode of the first display unit number and the display mode of the second display unit number are different.
According to this, it can be easily recognized whether it is the first owning value before conversion or the second owning value after conversion.

The fifth aspect of the first invention is
The gaming apparatus described in any one of 1 to 4 of the first invention (card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment),
The gaming machine is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine) capable of playing a game using gaming media (pachinko balls, medals),
The gaming device is
A possessed gaming medium number counting unit (counting payout unit 380) capable of counting the possessed gaming medium number of the player playing the game on the gaming machine;
When the number of owned gaming media (the number of owned possessions and the number of possessed medals) counted by the owned gaming media number counting means reaches a first value (the first display threshold), a predetermined image (dollar box, one thousand and two boxes, and ball bulk) Display control for causing the display means (display unit 340) to display the stepwise display), and even if the number of owned game media is below the first value when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, The difference between the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value by a predetermined number of times than the first value (for example, 125 balls, which is one payout number of pachinko balls, 50 sheets, which is one payout number of medals Alternatively, the predetermined image is not displayed if it has reached a small second value (first non-display threshold), and the predetermined image is not displayed if the value falls below the second value. Control means (display control board 329) capable of executing non-display control to If a gaming device, characterized in that it further comprises a.
According to this, the number of possessed game media of the player who plays the game in the gaming machine is counted by the possessed game media number counting means, and the predetermined image is displayed on the display means based on the counted number of possessed game media. It is possible to realize an intuitively easy-to-understand display showing the number of owned game media and the game state. Further, the second value for not displaying the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference between the first value and the second value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being switched frequently due to the increase or decrease of the number of owned gaming media at the threshold.

The sixth aspect of the first invention is
It is a game apparatus described in 3 or 5 of the first invention, wherein
The display control means, when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the number of owned gaming media is a predetermined trigger (for example, a single refund of pachinko balls or medals, enclosed pachinko machine 2B or Number that the number of possessed gaming media decreases (for example, 125 balls of pachinko balls being paid out one time, payout of medals once) to a point deduction based on one lending operation of gaming media in an enclosed slot machine The predetermined number of minutes set based on the number of 50 sheets and the number of deduction points per time (for example, 200 balls giving allowance to 125 balls of pachinko balls, 75 giving allowance to 50 pieces of medals) The gaming apparatus is characterized in that the non-display control is executed when the number of deduction points per sheet is made smaller than the second value smaller than the first value. is there.
According to this, it is possible to optimize the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value based on the number at which the number of owned gaming media decreases as the predetermined trigger occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent frequent switching of display / non-display of a predetermined image due to increase or decrease in the number of owned gaming media at the threshold.

The seventh aspect of the first invention is
It is the gaming apparatus described in 5 of the first invention,
The gaming media is paid back to the player within the number of owned gaming media (refunding of gaming media by control of the card unit 3, reimbursement of gaming media by nozzles, gaming in the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B or enclosed type slot machine Further comprising a refund control means (count withdrawal unit 380) for performing control for the medium, including a deduction based on the lending operation of the medium),
The possessed game medium number counting means has a received game medium number counting means (counting sensor of the count withdrawal unit 380) capable of counting the received game medium number, and the counting result of the received game medium number counting means and the refund The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of owned gaming media is updated based on the number of payouts by the control means.
According to this, by updating the number of owned gaming media based on the received counting result of gaming media and the number of payouts of gaming media, it becomes possible to count the number of owned gaming media correctly, and display / display of a predetermined image It becomes possible to properly control the non-display.

The eighth aspect of the first invention is
The gaming apparatus according to any one of 3 and 5 to 7 of the first invention,
The display control means controls the display of the predetermined image to be updated stepwise according to the number of owned game media (increases the number of dollar boxes, increases ball bulk),
It is possible to specify the display step of the predetermined image displayed on the display means (updating of the display counter value according to the display step, the number of predetermined reference game media (for example, Storage means (RAM 330) for storing (setting of display flag) based on the number obtained by adding the display threshold);
And determining means (CPU 310) for determining a display step of the predetermined image to be displayed on the display control means based on the display step stored in the storage means and the number of owned game media. Game device.
According to this, when the display step of the predetermined image displayed on the display means is stored so as to be identifiable, in particular, when the predetermined number of game media is a number between the first value and the second value. It is possible to appropriately determine whether to display or hide the predetermined image.

Further, 9 of the first invention is
A game apparatus according to any one of 3 and 5 to 8 of the first invention,
The display control means, when the number of owned gaming media reaches a third value (second display threshold) larger than the first value, the predetermined image (stepwise display of dollar box, one-man box, and ball bulk) Can be executed to cause the display means to display a second predetermined image different from the predetermined image (a special box, a box, a new staged display of ball bulk) different from the predetermined image. It is a game device characterized by being.
According to this, since the second predetermined image can be newly displayed after the predetermined image is not displayed according to the increase in the number of owned game media, the width of the display can be further expanded.

Further, 10 of the first invention is
The gaming apparatus according to any one of 3 and 5 to 9 of the first invention,
The display control means, when the number of owned game media reaches a third value (second display threshold) larger than the first value, the predetermined image (doll box, one thousand box, ball bulk) to the display means A second display for displaying on the display means a second predetermined image different from the predetermined image (a special box, a box, a new box for the ball volume, and the like). A gaming apparatus characterized in that control can be performed.
According to this, since the display of the predetermined image can be continued and the second predetermined image can be newly displayed according to the increase in the number of owned game media, the width of the display can be further expanded.

Further, 11 of the first invention is
The gaming apparatus described in 9 or 10 of the first invention, wherein
When the second predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the display control means causes the number of owned game media to be equal to the second predetermined number more than the third value (a second display threshold and a second non-display Difference with the threshold: For example, 125 balls which are the number of withdrawals of pachinko balls, 200 balls which give a certain margin to this, 50 sheets which is one number of payouts of medals, a certain margin to this If the number of the provided 75 images or the predetermined setting value) has reached a small fourth value (second non-display threshold), the second predetermined image is not displayed but is below the fourth value, A gaming apparatus characterized in that second non-display control for making the second predetermined image non-displayable is executable.
According to this, it is possible to newly display the second predetermined image according to the increase in the number of owned game media. Further, the fourth value for not displaying the second predetermined image is smaller by a second predetermined number than the third value for displaying the second predetermined image. By providing the difference between the third value and the fourth value for the second predetermined number, it is prevented that the display / non-display of the second predetermined image is frequently switched due to the increase or decrease of the number of gaming media possessed by the threshold. be able to.

The twelfth aspect of the first invention is
It is a gaming apparatus described in 11 of the first invention,
The display control means, when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the number of owned gaming media is more than the first value by the predetermined number (the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold Difference: For example, when it is less than the second value smaller than 200 balls with balls, 75 sheets with medals, or a predetermined first set value), the non-display control is executed, and the second display means performs the second control. When the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined number (the second display threshold and the second value) is set as the number of owned gaming media being larger than the difference between the first value and the second value. 2 Difference with non-display threshold: for example, 400 balls with pachinko balls, 150 sheets with medals, or a predetermined second set value) the second value is smaller than the fourth value, the second value A gaming apparatus characterized by executing non-display control.
According to this, the second predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the third value and the fourth value is larger than the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value. Therefore, the second predetermined image can be made less likely to be hidden as compared to the predetermined image.

[8-2. Second invention]
Conventionally, as shown in prior art document 2 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-005655), it is provided corresponding to a gaming machine, and provided with each counter, and the number of balls counted by the each counter. A gaming device for paying out gaming media within a range, wherein the number of balls having the same rate as the lending rate (for example, 4 yen) of gaming media in the gaming device satisfies a predetermined number of payouts (for example, 125) It is known to perform processing (so-called entry) in which the number of balls possessed by another rate (for example, 1 yen) is converted into the number of balls possessed by the loan rate, if not.

  However, in the gaming apparatus of the prior art document 2, there is a possibility that the storage amount of the number of balls held may be increased excessively in connection with the conversion.

  The second invention is made under such background, and the purpose is to set the first ownership value corresponding to one loan rate to the second ownership value corresponding to the other loan rate. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming system and a management device in which the amount of storage of ownership value does not increase excessively with the conversion when converting.

First, 1 of the second invention is
Owning value (the number of stored balls, the number of possessed balls, possession) which can be used for playing in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) Ownership value management means (the ball table of the control unit 122 of the ball rental unit 120, the member management device 162, and the like) which manages the number of medals) for each lending rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) Storage ball database, member card management data of ball management computer 8 and visitor card management data),
Convert the first ownership value (for example, 4 yen number of balls) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means into the second ownership value (for example, 1 yen balls number) corresponding to the other loan rates Converting means (a CPU of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120 that performs the conversion process of S118, a CPU of the member management device 162, and a CPU of the ball management computer 8);
A gaming system (the gaming system 1 according to the first embodiment, a fourth gaming system 1B according to the fourth embodiment),
In the conversion means, as a conversion condition, the sum total of the second own value when the first own value is converted and the second own value managed by the management means is a specific value If the number of stored 4 yen balls before conversion is X, the number of stored 4 yen balls of X is Y, and the number of 1 yen yen balls before conversion is Z, the formula 2 of 4Y + Z ≦ specific value If the number of 1 yen balls stored before conversion is x, the number of 1 yen balls stored for conversion is y, and the number of 4 yen balls stored before conversion is z, then (y / 4) + z ≦ The gaming system is characterized in that the conversion is performed according to the special value equation 2 ′).
According to this, it is possible to prevent the storage amount of possessive value from excessively increasing with conversion.

The second aspect of the second invention is
Owning value (the number of stored balls, the number of possessed balls, possession) which can be used for playing in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) Ownership value management means (the ball table of the control unit 122 of the ball rental unit 120, the member management device 162, and the like) which manages the number of medals) for each lending rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) Storage ball database, member card management data of ball management computer 8 and visitor card management data),
Convert the first ownership value (for example, 4 yen number of balls) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means into the second ownership value (for example, 1 yen balls number) corresponding to the other loan rates Converting means (a CPU of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120 that performs the conversion process of S118, a CPU of the member management device 162, and a CPU of the ball management computer 8);
A gaming system (the gaming system 1 according to the first embodiment, a fourth gaming system 1B according to the fourth embodiment),
The conversion unit is configured to convert, as conversion conditions, the second ownership value when the first ownership value is converted and the first ownership value of the items managed by the management unit. When the combined value of the remaining first owning value of the second and the second owning value managed by the managing means does not exceed the specific value (4 yen number of balls before conversion is X, out of X When the number of stored 4 yen balls converted is Y, and the number of stored 1 yen balls before conversion is Z, (X-Y) + 4Y + Z 特定 specific value equation 1 or 1 yen stored balls number before conversion If the number of 1-yen storage balls to be converted out of x is y, and the number of 4-yen storage balls before conversion is z, (x−y) + (y / 4) + z ≦ specific value (250,000 in this example) Ball) in the case of satisfying equation 1 '), the conversion is performed.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the storage amount of possessive value from excessively increasing with conversion.

The third aspect of the second invention is
It is a game system described in 1 or 2 of the 2nd invention,
The conversion means, as a conversion condition, when the second owning value when the first owning value is converted does not exceed the specific value (4 yen number of balls before conversion, X, among the X When the number of stored 4 yen balls converted is Y, 4Y ≦ specific value equation 0 is satisfied, or the number of stored 1 yen balls before conversion is x, and the number of stored 1 yen balls of x is y In the case of y / 4 ≦ specific value equation 0 ′), the conversion is performed in the case where y / 4 ≦ specific value.
According to this, when the second owning value when the first owning value is converted exceeds the specific value, the other converting condition is not satisfied, and therefore, whether the other converting condition is satisfied or not There is no need to judge

The fourth aspect of the second invention is
It is a gaming system described in any one of 1 to 3 of the second invention,
Reception means (a specification button displayed on the display 124) for receiving specification of the first owned value to be converted by the conversion means;
Informing means for informing the first possession value satisfying the conversion condition (display 124 for displaying the allowable number of balls such that the number of stored balls after conversion is within the set upper limit in the conversion impossible display 1) And a gaming system characterized by further comprising
According to this, since the conversion can be made as much as possible, the convenience of the player can be improved.

The fifth aspect of the second invention is
It is a gaming system described in any one of 1 to 4 of the second invention,
It is provided corresponding to the game machine, receives the record medium which can specify the ownership value which is managed with the above-mentioned management expedient, receives the ownership value which is specified from the record medium (member card 103 and balls card) The game apparatus (the ball lending unit 120 according to the first embodiment, the card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment) for performing the process (the ball replaying process, the payout control process for the number of balls possessed) to be used
The management means is provided in a management device capable of communicating with the gaming device,
The gaming device is
Ownership value specifying means (CPU of control unit 122 that performs the matching process of S100) for specifying the ownership value from the recording medium based on the acceptance of the recording medium (YES in S01);
And converting condition determination means (CPU of the control unit 122 which performs the process of S105) that determines whether or not the conversion condition is satisfied based on the owning value specified by the owning value specifying means. It is a gaming system to be
According to this, since the game apparatus determines whether the conversion condition is satisfied, the processing load on the management apparatus can be reduced.

The sixth aspect of the second invention is
Owning value (the number of stored balls, the number of possessed balls, possession) which can be used for playing in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) Ownership value management means (the ball storage DB of the membership management device 162, member card management of the ball management computer 8) which manages the number of medals for each lending rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the ownership value is lent Data and visitor card management data),
Convert the first ownership value (for example, 4 yen number of balls) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means into the second ownership value (for example, 1 yen balls number) corresponding to the other loan rates Conversion means (CPU of member management device 162, CPU of ball management computer 8),
Management device (member management device 162, ball management computer 8),
In the conversion means, as a conversion condition, the sum of the second own value when the first own value is converted and the second own value managed by the management means is a specific value If it does not exceed (4 yen number of stored balls before conversion is X, the number of stored 4 yen balls of X is Y, number of 1 yen balls before conversion is Z, formula 2 of 4Y + Z ≦ specific value Or when the number of 1 yen balls before conversion is x, the number of 1 yen balls to be converted of x is y, and the number of 4 yen balls before conversion is z, (y / 4) + z ≦ specificity The management apparatus is characterized in that the conversion is performed according to the equation 2 ′ of value).
According to this, it is possible to prevent the storage amount of possessive value from excessively increasing with conversion.

The seventh aspect of the second invention is
Owning value (the number of stored balls, the number of possessed balls, possession) which can be used for playing in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) Ownership value management means (the ball storage DB of the membership management device 162, member card management of the ball management computer 8) which manages the number of medals for each lending rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the ownership value is lent Data and visitor card management data),
Convert the first ownership value (for example, 4 yen number of balls) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means into the second ownership value (for example, 1 yen balls number) corresponding to the other loan rates Conversion means (CPU of member management device 162, CPU of ball management computer 8),
Management device (member management device 162, ball management computer 8),
The conversion unit is configured to convert, as conversion conditions, the second ownership value when the first ownership value is converted and the first ownership value of the items managed by the management unit. When the combined value of the remaining first owning value of the second and the second owning value managed by the managing means does not exceed the specific value (4 yen number of balls before conversion is X, out of X When the number of stored 4 yen balls converted is Y, and the number of stored 1 yen balls before conversion is Z, (X-Y) + 4Y + Z 特定 specific value equation 1 or 1 yen stored balls number before conversion If the number of 1-yen storage balls to be converted out of x is y, and the number of 4-yen storage balls before conversion is z, (x−y) + (y / 4) + z ≦ specific value (250,000 in this example) Ball is a management device characterized in that the above conversion is performed in the case where Expression 1 ′ is satisfied.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the storage amount of possessive value from excessively increasing with conversion.

The eighth aspect of the second invention is
The management apparatus according to 6 or 7 of the second invention,
The conversion means, as a conversion condition, when the second owning value when the first owning value is converted does not exceed the specific value (4 yen number of balls before conversion, X, among the X When the number of stored 4 yen balls converted is Y, 4Y ≦ specific value equation 0 is satisfied, or the number of stored 1 yen balls before conversion is x, and the number of stored 1 yen balls of x is y In this case, the management device is characterized in that the conversion is performed when y / 4 ≦ specific value equation 0 ′ is satisfied).
According to this, it is possible to prevent the storage amount of possessive value from excessively increasing with conversion.

Further, 9 of the second invention is
The management apparatus described in any one of 6 to 8 of the second invention,
It is a management apparatus characterized by having history storage means which memorizes a history of conversion performed by the conversion means.
According to this, since the conversion history can be confirmed, it is possible to prevent a fraud or the like.

[8-3. Third invention]

  Conventionally, as shown in prior art document 3 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-005655), it is provided corresponding to a game machine, and provided with each counter, and the number of balls counted by the each counter. A gaming device for paying out gaming media within a range, wherein the number of balls having the same rate as the lending rate (for example, 4 yen) of gaming media in the gaming device satisfies a predetermined number of payouts (for example, 125) It is known to perform processing (so-called entry) in which the number of balls possessed by another rate (for example, 1 yen) is converted into the number of balls possessed by the loan rate, if not.

  However, in the gaming apparatus of the prior art reference 3, when other processing is performed when the conversion is performed, the possession value such as the number of balls is changed, which causes the player to be confused. There was a problem to occur.

  The third invention is made under such a background, and the purpose is to set the first ownership value corresponding to one loan rate to the second ownership value corresponding to the other loan rate. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming apparatus capable of preventing a situation in which a player's value is changed to disturb a player when converting.

First, one of the third invention is
Owning value (the number of stored balls) which can be used for playing in the gaming machine (the pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, the slot machine) Ownership value storage means (the ball table of the control unit 122) for storing the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals, for each lending rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the owned value is lent;
Convert a first ownership value (for example, 4 yen number of balls) corresponding to one loan rate stored in the ownership value storage means into a second ownership value (for example, 1 yen balls number) corresponding to the other loan rates Conversion processing means (the CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the conversion process of S118) that performs the conversion process to
A gaming apparatus (a ball lending unit 120 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and a card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment),
It is characterized by further comprising first limiting means (CPU of the control unit 122 which performs the processing of S101) for limiting the execution of lending at the one lending rate and the other lending rate when the conversion process is performed. It is a gaming device to be
According to this, since the execution of the loan is limited when the conversion process is performed, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the ownership value changes and the player is confused.

The second aspect of the third invention is
It is a gaming apparatus described in 1 of the third invention,
The conversion processing means is a gaming apparatus characterized in that execution of the conversion processing is restricted while the processing of the loan (the ball lending processing of S300) is being performed.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ownership value changes due to the conversion process being executed while the loan process is being performed and the player is confused.

The third aspect of the third invention is
The possessing value lends the possessing value (the number of stored balls, the number of possessed balls, the possessed number of medals) that can be used for playing in the gaming machine (the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) and owned by the player. Owning value storage means (the ball table of the control unit 122) for storing for each lending rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) at the time of payment, and
Convert a first ownership value (for example, 4 yen number of balls) corresponding to one loan rate stored in the ownership value storage means into a second ownership value (for example, 1 yen balls number) corresponding to the other loan rates Conversion processing means (the CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the conversion process of S118) that performs the conversion process to
A gaming apparatus (a card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment) comprising
Counting means (counting payout unit 380) for counting the possession value (number of balls possessed) obtained by the player by playing the game on the gaming machine;
And a second limiting unit (CPU of the control unit 122 performing the process of S101) for limiting execution of counting by the counting unit when the conversion process is performed. .
According to this, since the execution of counting is limited when the conversion process is performed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ownership value changes and the player is confused.

The fourth aspect of the third invention is
It is a game apparatus described in 3 of the third invention,
The conversion processing means is a gaming apparatus characterized in that execution of the conversion processing is restricted while the counting is being performed.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the situation that the possessive value is changed by the conversion process being executed while the counting is being performed, and the player is confused.

The fifth aspect of the third invention is
Owning value (the number of stored balls) which can be used for playing in the gaming machine (the pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, the slot machine) Ownership value storage means (the ball table of the control unit 122) for storing the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals, for each lending rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the owned value is lent;
Convert a first ownership value (for example, 4 yen number of balls) corresponding to one loan rate stored in the ownership value storage means into a second ownership value (for example, 1 yen balls number) corresponding to the other loan rates Conversion processing means (the CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the conversion process of S118) that performs the conversion process to
A gaming apparatus (a ball lending unit 120 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and a card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment),
When the conversion process is performed, execution of use process (S500 ball replay processing, withdrawal process of the number of possession balls of H29, firing of pachinko balls in the enclosed type pachinko machine) for causing the game to use the possession value The game apparatus according to the present invention is further provided with third restriction means (CPU of the control unit 122 which performs the process of S101) for restricting.
According to this, since the execution of the use process is restricted when the conversion process is performed, it is possible to prevent the situation where the owned value changes and the player is confused.

The sixth aspect of the third invention is
It is a gaming apparatus described in 5 of the third invention,
The conversion processing means restricts the execution of the conversion processing while the payout (relay processing of the stored balls in S500, the payout processing of the number of balls possessed by H29, and the firing of pachinko balls in the enclosed type pachinko machine) is being performed. It is a game device characterized by.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the situation that the possessive value is changed by the conversion process being executed while the use process is being performed, and the player is confused.

The seventh aspect of the third invention is
It is a game apparatus described in any one of 1 to 6 of the third invention,
The first display unit number obtained by converting the first ownership value before conversion in a predetermined display unit (2000 balls) and the second ownership value after conversion are converted in the predetermined display unit The gaming apparatus further comprises unit number display means for displaying the second display unit number (S 102 and the CPU of the control unit 122 performing the processing of S 109 or S 115 and the display 124).
According to this, the first number of display units obtained by converting the first ownership value before conversion in a predetermined display unit and the second number of conversions after the conversion are converted in a predetermined display unit Since the number of display units is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize how much the game is possible based on the possession value of the other loan rate after conversion.

The eighth aspect of the third invention is
The gaming apparatus (card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment) described in any one of 1 to 7 of the third invention,
The gaming machine is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine) capable of playing a game using gaming media (pachinko balls, medals),
When the number of owned game media (the number of owned balls and the number of possessed medals) of the player playing the game on the gaming machine reaches a first value (the first display threshold), the gaming device receives a predetermined image (dollar box, one thousand box) Display control for causing the display means (display section 340) to display the stepwise display of ball bulk, and the number of owned game media has the first value when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means Even if it falls below the first value, the difference between the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value may be a predetermined number more than the first value (for example, 125 balls which is one payout number of pachinko balls, one payout number of medals The predetermined image is not displayed if it has reached a small second value (first non-display threshold) which is 50 sheets or a predetermined set value, and the predetermined image is not displayed if the value is below the second value. Control means (display control board 3) capable of executing non-display control for making the display non-display 9) further comprising a a gaming apparatus according to claim.
According to this, it is possible to realize an intuitively easy-to-understand display indicating the number of gaming media possessed by the player and the gaming state by displaying the predetermined image on the display means based on the number of gaming media possessed. Further, the second value for not displaying the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference between the first value and the second value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being switched frequently due to the increase or decrease of the number of owned gaming media at the threshold.

Further, 9 of the third invention is
The gaming apparatus (card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment) described in any one of 1 to 7 of the third invention,
The gaming machine is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine) capable of playing a game using gaming media (pachinko balls, medals),
The gaming device is
A possessed gaming medium number counting unit (counting payout unit 380) capable of counting the possessed gaming medium number of the player playing the game on the gaming machine;
When the number of owned gaming media (the number of owned possessions and the number of possessed medals) counted by the owned gaming media number counting means reaches a first value (the first display threshold), a predetermined image (dollar box, one thousand and two boxes, and ball bulk) Display control for causing the display means (display unit 340) to display the stepwise display), and even if the number of owned game media is below the first value when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, The difference between the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value by a predetermined number of times than the first value (for example, 125 balls, which is one payout number of pachinko balls, 50 sheets, which is one payout number of medals Alternatively, the predetermined image is not displayed if it has reached a small second value (first non-display threshold), and the predetermined image is not displayed if the value falls below the second value. Control means (display control board 329) capable of executing non-display control to If a gaming device, characterized in that it further comprises a.
According to this, the number of possessed game media of the player who plays the game in the gaming machine is counted by the possessed game media number counting means, and the predetermined image is displayed on the display means based on the counted number of possessed game media. It is possible to realize an intuitively easy-to-understand display showing the number of owned game media and the game state. Further, the second value for not displaying the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference between the first value and the second value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being switched frequently due to the increase or decrease of the number of owned gaming media at the threshold.

Further, 10 of the third invention is
It is a game apparatus described in 8 or 9 of the third invention,
The display control means, when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the number of owned gaming media is a predetermined trigger (for example, a single refund of pachinko balls or medals, enclosed pachinko machine 2B or Number that the number of possessed gaming media decreases (for example, 125 balls of pachinko balls being paid out one time, payout of medals once) to a point deduction based on one lending operation of gaming media in an enclosed slot machine The predetermined number of minutes set based on the number of 50 sheets and the number of deduction points per time (for example, 200 balls giving allowance to 125 balls of pachinko balls, 75 giving allowance to 50 pieces of medals) The gaming apparatus is characterized in that the non-display control is executed when the number of deduction points per sheet is made smaller than the second value smaller than the first value. is there.
According to this, it is possible to optimize the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value based on the number at which the number of owned gaming media decreases as the predetermined trigger occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent frequent switching of display / non-display of a predetermined image due to increase or decrease in the number of owned gaming media at the threshold.

Further, 11 of the third invention is
It is a gaming apparatus described in 9 of the third invention,
The gaming media is paid back to the player within the number of owned gaming media (refunding of gaming media by control of the card unit 3, reimbursement of gaming media by nozzles, gaming in the enclosed type pachinko machine 2B or enclosed type slot machine Further comprising a refund control means (count withdrawal unit 380) for performing control for the medium, including a deduction based on the lending operation of the medium),
The possessed game medium number counting means has a received game medium number counting means (counting sensor of the count withdrawal unit 380) capable of counting the received game medium number, and the counting result of the received game medium number counting means and the refund The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of owned gaming media is updated based on the number of payouts by the control means.
According to this, by updating the number of owned gaming media based on the received counting result of gaming media and the number of payouts of gaming media, it becomes possible to count the number of owned gaming media correctly, and display / display of a predetermined image It becomes possible to properly control the non-display.

The twelfth aspect of the third invention is
The gaming apparatus according to any one of 8 to 11 of the third invention, wherein
The display control means controls the display of the predetermined image to be updated stepwise according to the number of owned game media (increases the number of dollar boxes, increases ball bulk),
It is possible to specify the display step of the predetermined image displayed on the display means (updating of the display counter value according to the display step, the number of predetermined reference game media (for example, Storage means (RAM 330) for storing (setting of display flag) based on the number obtained by adding the display threshold);
And determining means (CPU 310) for determining a display step of the predetermined image to be displayed on the display control means based on the display step stored in the storage means and the number of owned game media. Game device.
According to this, when the display step of the predetermined image displayed on the display means is stored so as to be identifiable, in particular, when the predetermined number of game media is a number between the first value and the second value. It is possible to appropriately determine whether to display or hide the predetermined image.

The thirteenth aspect of the third invention is
The gaming apparatus according to any one of 8 to 12 of the third invention,
The display control means, when the number of owned gaming media reaches a third value (second display threshold) larger than the first value, the predetermined image (stepwise display of dollar box, one-man box, and ball bulk) Can be executed to cause the display means to display a second predetermined image different from the predetermined image (a special box, a box, a new staged display of ball bulk) different from the predetermined image. It is a game device characterized by being.
According to this, since the second predetermined image can be newly displayed after the predetermined image is not displayed according to the increase in the number of owned game media, the width of the display can be further expanded.

Further, 14 of the third invention is
It is a game apparatus described in any one of 8 to 13 of the third invention,
The display control means, when the number of owned game media reaches a third value (second display threshold) larger than the first value, the predetermined image (doll box, one thousand box, ball bulk) to the display means A second display for displaying on the display means a second predetermined image different from the predetermined image (a special box, a box, a new box for the ball volume, and the like). A gaming apparatus characterized in that control can be performed.
According to this, since the display of the predetermined image can be continued and the second predetermined image can be newly displayed according to the increase in the number of owned game media, the width of the display can be further expanded.

Also, 15 of the third invention is
It is the game apparatus described in 13 or 14 of the third invention,
When the second predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the display control means causes the number of owned game media to be equal to the second predetermined number more than the third value (a second display threshold and a second non-display Difference with the threshold: For example, 125 balls which are the number of withdrawals of pachinko balls, 200 balls which give a certain margin to this, 50 sheets which is one number of payouts of medals, a certain margin to this If the number of the provided 75 images or the predetermined setting value) has reached a small fourth value (second non-display threshold), the second predetermined image is not displayed but is below the fourth value, A gaming apparatus characterized in that second non-display control for making the second predetermined image non-displayable is executable.
According to this, it is possible to newly display the second predetermined image according to the increase in the number of owned game media. Further, the fourth value for not displaying the second predetermined image is smaller by a second predetermined number than the third value for displaying the second predetermined image. By providing the difference between the third value and the fourth value for the second predetermined number, it is prevented that the display / non-display of the second predetermined image is frequently switched due to the increase or decrease of the number of gaming media possessed by the threshold. be able to.

Also, 16 of the third invention is
It is a gaming apparatus described in 15 of the third invention,
The display control means, when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the number of owned gaming media is more than the first value by the predetermined number (the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold Difference: For example, when it is less than the second value smaller than 200 balls with balls, 75 sheets with medals, or a predetermined first set value), the non-display control is executed, and the second display means performs the second control. When the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined number (the second display threshold and the second value) is set as the number of owned gaming media being larger than the difference between the first value and the second value. 2 Difference with non-display threshold: for example, 400 balls with pachinko balls, 150 sheets with medals, or a predetermined second set value) the second value is smaller than the fourth value, the second value A gaming apparatus characterized by executing non-display control.
According to this, the second predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the third value and the fourth value is larger than the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value. Therefore, the second predetermined image can be made less likely to be hidden as compared to the predetermined image.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game system 1A ... 3rd game system 1B ... 4th game system 1C ... 5th game system 2 ... Pachinko machine 2B ... enclosed type pachinko machine 3 ... Card unit 4 ... Data display device 5 ... Inter-table count Unit 6 Hall computer 7 Counter for each car 8 Ball control computer 9 Ringing lamp device
110 ... Pachinko machine 120 ... card unit 124 ... (touch panel type) display 125 ... card R / W
160 Hall computer 161 Balance management device 162 Member management device 1400 Information display device 1410 First display unit 1420 Second display unit S Slot machine

Claims (1)

It is provided corresponding to the gaming machine,
A first display unit capable of displaying at least game data;
A second display unit capable of displaying advantage data, which is game data in an advantageous state for the player, to which the corresponding gaming machine corresponds;
An information display device having
The information processing apparatus further includes movement processing means for moving the second display unit to a predetermined position based on the predetermined information indicating the advantageous state being input to the information display device.
The second display unit, when in the position overlapping with the first display unit, Ri displayable der the display content of the first display unit is hidden by the second display unit,
A first predetermined image is displayed on the first display unit when the number of owned game media of the player playing the game in the gaming machine reaches a first value, and the first predetermined image is displayed on the first display unit. Even if the number of owned game media is less than the first value, the mode of the first predetermined image is changed if the second value, which is smaller by the first predetermined number than the first value, is reached. A first display control which continues to be displayed and a first non-display control for making the first predetermined image non-display when the number of owned gaming media falls below the second value Display control means,
A second display control for causing the first display unit to display a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image when the number of owned game media reaches a third value larger than the first value; Even when the number of owned game media is less than the third value when the second predetermined image is displayed on the first display portion, the fourth value is decreased by a second predetermined number smaller than the third value. And second non-display control for making the second predetermined image non-display, when the second predetermined image is not displayed and is lower than the fourth value. Control means, and
The information display device, wherein the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number .

Images